Home

2014 Ram Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual

1. ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light Tire Types e cua vide ei tea 3 head 537 And ESC OFF Indicator Light 519 Run Flat Tires If Equipped 538 d op ONO M p Persea Spare Tires If Equipped 539 M USESSEPDEINEORNGHION stipite uide ae Tire Spinning eee o ke eE 541 Tue MAUSEBN cc eerie sedie dese el Tread Wear Indicators 542 Tire Identification Number TIN 525 Life OF Tire LL LLL Tire Terminology And Definitions 527 Replacement Tires Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 528 E SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE M TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 533 INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED 544 Tire Pressure 2 1 ee eee ee ee 533 Ml TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 545 Tire Inflation Pressures 0 534 BI TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 547 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 536 Directional Tires If Equipped 548 Radial Ply Tires 04 536 Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped 548 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Se E TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 549 Materials Added To Fuel 562 Base System sans 90g io Mos a p CE oes 552 Fuel System Cautions 6 563 Pre
2. U S Metric Fuel Approximate 1500 Regular Cab Shortbed Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters 1500 Regular Cab Longbed Crew Quad Cab Models Optional 32 Gallons 121 Liters 2500 3500 Shortbed Models 34 Gallons 129 Liters 2500 3500 Longbed Models 35 Gallons 132 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3 6L Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 5 7L Engines We recommend you use SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters 5 7L Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W 30 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters for 2500 3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating greater than 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 6 4L Engines We recommend you use SAE 0W 40 engine oil meet 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters ing the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12633 for use in all operating temperatures ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 733 U S Metric Cooling System 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula that meets the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 14 Quarts 13 Liters 5 7L Engine 1500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 16 Quarts 15 Liters 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula that meets the requir
3. Pink Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F15 30 Amp Electric Park Brake F24 30 Amp Driver Door Mod Pink Right Side If Pink ule Equipped F25 30 Amp Front Wiper Low F19 30 Amp SCR If Equipped Pink Speed Pink F25 30 Amp Front Wiper High F20 30 Amp Passenger Door Pink Speed Pink Module F26 30 Amp Antilock Brakes F21 30 Amp Drive Train Control Pink Stability Control Pink Module Module Valves F22 20 Amp Engine Control F28 20 Amp Trailer Tow Backup Yellow Module Yellow Lights If F23 30 Amp Body Controller 1 Equipped ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 713 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F29 20 Amp Trailer Tow Parking F34 30 Amp Vehicle System In Yellow Lights If Pink terface Module 2 Equipped If Equipped F30 30 Amp Trailer Tow Recep F35 30 Amp Sunroof If Pink tacle Pink Equipped F32 30 Amp Drive Train Control F36 30 Amp Rear Defroster If Pink Module If Pink Equipped Equipped F37 30 Amp Cummins Diesel F33 20 Amp Cummins Diesel Pink Fuel Heater 2 if Yellow Fuel Heater 1 If equipped Equipped Rear F38 30 Amp Power Inverter Blower If Pink 115V AC If Equipped Equipped 714 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Micro Descriptio
4. sss 366 Cold Weather 776 INDEX eee Engine Fails to Start sess ieas asa iai auas 369 REMOTE s s Baa doe cel Rib nad Era es 34 Starting Procedures Gas Engines 366 Steering POWE eae KGS eee Ae raai eke aa add 496 Wheel Heated 0 00 00 eee eee 184 Wheel Tilto e escalera 183 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 335 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 335 Storage Compartment Center Seat 237 Storage Vehicle a prie n nA S E ENA 357 Storing Your Vehicle llle 720 SUN ROOF se sos are Aes e be eoe e Res 222 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 544 Suspension Air osiensa yaad aata a aS eA 436 Sway Control Trailer 00 0000 520 synthetic Engine Qil s cds pe nesa tee 678 System Remote Starting ses esaeet ae a 34 Tachometeir e asise ai a eRe E e eE E es 275 Tailgate 2 sue a thon Bart e E AEE E E 263 Tilt Steering Column 00000 183 Tip Stat aces sodA eae eee e ok RC e ue 367 Tire and Loading Information Placard 528 Tire Markings ak one aede age a dr KORR dr e 521 ARES soos ag OS ae Ron RIPE PP ESAS 128 Aging Life of Tires lesse 542 Air Pressure sisas ma ETUR y BR VeRO AE Y 533 Chais a cess bo hb 5 dor pae ha cr Mord m eg rg 545 Compact Spare suis Aaa oE E En ae E i 539 Dial 22decicu kx ke a ra Wn IEE aa Ya 548 General Information 00 00005 533 High Speed
5. When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instru ment panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position 031464204 Automatic Headlight Position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Daytime Running Lights DRL
6. Alarm Panie dece OU cedi aan open e a CR an 28 Alarm Security Alarm sares sirasi anea ess 21 Alarm System Security Alarm 21 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antifreeze Engine Coolant lisse 688 Disposal iu Eb epa dra RS d 691 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 505 Anti Lock Warning Light llle 275 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 21 Anti Theft System rea llle eere 21 Appearance Caren ieue y aias EEE ee 702 ASDtray ito ea inse Epruno pde pu e E 230 Auto Down Power Windows llus 48 Automatic Door Locks lille 40 Automatic Headlights llle 169 Automatic Transmission elles 379 Adding Pid nts ses oes oe xU aS 700 Fluid and Filter Changes 701 Fluid Change iae ERIS dep UR Ron 701 en INDEX 763 Fluid Level Check 00 0005 698 PIU Type decertare tre muore hcl Sey t deed 698 SHINE iseccasccsaa Rech eer dnd ha d 389 Special Additives sese a ana 698 Axle Fluid gue RR E LR d 696 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid sls 696 Back Up Camera isle 208 Bar Stabilizer Sway System ills 450 Battery sec de sedes d hana acea dog ed 679 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 30 Belts Seat s n o ER bale ER ea CLER 55 Body Builders Guide 00 0 0 ee eee 6 Body Mechanism Lubrication 682 B Pi
7. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat using a seat belt properly Continued WARNING Continued Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap i Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the ab
9. WARNING e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal inju ries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Latch Plate To Buckle Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a injury A belt worn under the arm can cause inter collision nal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a colli sion e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Removing Slack From Belt 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e
10. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 707 When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do no
11. It Equipped ec cere ees 239 SeatbackStorage llle 240 Storage Regular Cab 240 Storage and Seats Crew Cab 241 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models si 36 40 e m me 242 ll REAR WINDOW FEATURES 242 Rear Window Defroster 242 Power Sliding Rear Window It Equipped isses pee ect dores 243 Manual Sliding Rear Window It Equipped sss sre Rr 244 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 E FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED geste Eph eR or e CE CHOR drin 244 PICKUP BOX abuekQzreueera 2e aki 246 E RAMBOX IF EQUIPPED 06045 248 RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins 248 Locking And Unlocking RamBox 251 RamBox Safety Warning 252 Bed Extender If Equipped 253 Bed Rail Tie Down System 260 B SLIDE IN CAMPERS 3 ji ss0u exe Ve ane a 262 Camper Applications 262 Bl EASY OFF TAILGATE 00 263 Disconnecting the Rear Camera or Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 263 Removing The Tailgate Locking Tailgate llle TRI FOLD TONNEAU COVER IF EQUIPPED 266 Tri Fold Tonneau Cover If Equipped 266 Tri Fold Tonneau Cover Removal 266 Tri Fold Tonneau Cover Installation And Cleaning coe
12. Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or
13. CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 545 TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Please follow the table below for proper tire size chain Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body Ben oe ene clearance Follow these recommendations to guard against damage Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer Vehicle Axle Recommendations Tire Sizes Chain Class 1500 Models Rear Only P265 70R17 S Class 2500 Models Rear Only LT245 70R17E U Class LT265 70R18E LT275 70R18E 2500 Power Wagon Mod Rear Only LT285 70R17D U Class els 3500 Single Rear Wheel Rear Only LT265 70R18E U Class Models LT275 70R18E 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Front Rear LT235 80R17E U Class Models 546 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING CAUTION Continued e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac
14. Maintenance Pro cedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper cool ant selection Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting in high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging and Frosting Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in mild rainy and or humid weather Windows may frost on the inside of the glass in very cold weather To clear the windows select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur NOTE Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will au tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occ
15. The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears 380 STARTING AND OPERATING The transmission shifter control has only PARK RE VERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS switches described later in this section Pressing the GEAR GEAR switches on the steering wheel while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 051269900 Electronic Transmission Shifter Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle
16. The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans mitters One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to memory position 2 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard Programming The Memory Feature side of the drivers seat cushion 031105757 Memory Seat Buttons NOTE To create a new memory profile perform the following Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences seat side mirrors adjustable pedals and radio station presets Press and release the S Set button on the memory
17. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 531 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the avai
18. WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 755 WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washingion D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer
19. 032771343 032771342 Single 1 2 Second Tone Slow Tone 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 032771344 032771345 Fast Tone Continuous Tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle WARNING ALERTS Reduced Rear Distance Greater than 79 45 in 45 31 in 31 18 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 115 cm 115 80 cm 80 45 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Arc None 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st Solid Flashing Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch Pya OFF When the ParkSense switch is pressed to dis able the system the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARKSE
20. 3 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 4 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
21. Camera Delay When this feature is enabled it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds or 8 mph To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera Delay soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e ParkView Backup Camera Static Gridlines Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera Static Gridlines soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Fixed Guidelines that allows you to see Fixed Guidelines over the ParkView Back up Camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se display alo
22. NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use WARNING both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener damage to the vehicle ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could Continued 656 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se WARNING SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use one of the following procedures to temporarily move the shift lever Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus Column Shifter If Equipped ing serious injury 1 Turn the engine off Firmly apply the parking brake CAUTION Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a 2 3 vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal tow truck hookup or highway towing You could 5 1 Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port damage your vehicle ringed circle on the bottom of the steering column and push and hold the override release lever up Shift Lever Override Access Port 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NE
23. ParkSense will not operate If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the igni tion If the message continues to appear see an autho rized dealer If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper ating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e e e When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense amp when on will reduce
24. This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful The system allows the driver to select information by information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e e e e e e e Digital Speedometer Vehicle Info Fuel Economy Info Trip A Trip B Stop Start Info If Equipped Trailer Tow Audio Stored Messages Screen Setup Vehicle Settings Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5 0 amp 8 4 radio pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering 040971549 EVIC Steering Wheels Buttons e UP Arrow Button A Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and sub menus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages Screen Set Up e DOWN Arrow Button V Press and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and sub menus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages Screen Set Up UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 e SELECI RIGHT Arrow Button gt Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to access select the information screens or sub menu screens of a main menu item Press and hold the SELECT RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed selected fea tures that can be reset e LEFT Arrow Button lt Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu from an info screen or sub menu item 288 UNDERSTANDING YOU
25. To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety 756 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrat
26. When changing a front wheel place the scissor jack 4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Location under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel below wrench The tube extension may be used but is not required For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks when changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the drive tubes extending to the rear 060573855 4X4 Front Jacking Location 620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 4 By rotating the lug wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface WARNING 060606563 Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make Rear Jacking Location the vehicle unstable and cause a collision It could Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621 WARNING 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the whee
27. cator light will blink while the shift is in progress It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal nd The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the engine shift to NEUTRAL N is complete After the shift is running Firmly apply the parking brake completed and the NEUTRAL N light stays on release the NEUTRAL N button 2 Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL 6 Release the parking brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 601 7 8 Shift the transmission into REVERSE Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear 10 Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL Firmly apply 11 the parking brake Turn OFF the engine For vehicles with Keyless Enter N Go press and hold the EN GINE START STOP button until the engine shuts off Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear NOT in Neutral On 8 speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is turned off 12 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position then cycle the key or the Keyless Enter N Go button to the RUN position and back to the OFF position Remove the key
28. esee Foe RE RR Rn erga 536 Inflation Pressures llle 534 Life of Tires cera esa cae Rer ex t eee eats 542 Load Capacity xis ka hem REOR 528 Pressure Monitor System TPMS en INDEX 777 Pressure Warning Light 281 Quality Grading s dort ka seua eire akei 757 Radial seata nuca s d he alee EM 536 Replacements ax inde en Rr ete anna 543 Rotation uos ex dee du REPE 547 ri A ante 521 OIZOS ios iq 5 dos aed pud eh Ee ee ee eS 523 Snow Tires 6 24 ace cca eee Evae des 537 Spinning iiie uae meom AERE ass 541 Tread Wear Indicators 0 00005 542 Tire Safety Information lille 521 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 578 Tonneau COVER s sosea tar oe ae Gerd Ca Hae E 707 Tonneau Cover Cleaning 0045 707 Torque Converter Clutch 0 0 0 400 Tow Hooks Emergency llle 655 TOWING ace aceites hoec ek xe D wo eR KR in 569 Disabled Vehicle ret eard 660 Gilde 36s fuese decane pM ESTE 576 Recreational 413r ede d qe ee des 596 Wei Ds sete ote ansedttu E EE ies nnda 576 Traction usd 2349444634 00944 8 PST ESPS Y 471 Traction Control llle 506 Trailer Sway Control TSC 520 Trailer IOWIDg baa kee haere RR RR dre Aika ae 569 Cooling System Tips llle 591 Hitches ns ea ev ex nce de mr nr 3e ead G 575 Minimum Requirements 04 580 MifIOIS i263 ke Shae rerata Ead P S
29. may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds such as towing a trailer up a steep grade or in stop and go traffic during hot weather In these conditions torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear when climbing a grade or shifting to NEUTRAL when stopped in heavy traffic can help to reduce this excess heat generation During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold temperatures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is act
30. mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature e the engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to activate TOW HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode transmission upshifts are delayed and the trans mission will automatically downshift for engine brak ing during steady braking maneuvers 050170421 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation Normal operation is always the default at engine start up If TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started STARTING AND OPERATING 411 WARNING Do not use the TOW HAUL feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions The increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the po
31. refer to Disconnecting the Rear Camera If Equipped in this section Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang from the pivot NOTE Make sure tailgate is supported when removing support cables UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 6 Remove the tailgate from the vehicle NOTE Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box WARNING To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide which is deadly the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with Cap or Slide In Campers should extend beyond the overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks Locking Tang Locking Tailgate 3 Raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle The lock is located next to the tailgate handle The 4 Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking pivot clears the hanger bracket the truck with the key fob if equipped with remote keyl try 5 Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side aca pivot 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ig Tri Fold Tonneau Cover Removal TRI FOLD TONNEAU COVER IF EQUIPPED Tri Fold Tonneau Cover If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri Fold Tonneau Cover which consists of different features e Easy Tri Fold cover e Tonneau fore aft locator e Crosscar inside bed locator e Front and rear clamps e Stowage strap Locking Capability
32. tO E A EVE Sy RAM TRUCK et 3007 2500 3 500 _ _ OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2013 Chrysler Group LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CON
33. www dodgebodybuilder com This website contains di mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer s technical support For service issues contact your authorized dealer VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle INTRODUCTION 7 frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title WARNING Ho M aaa m Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 B VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM 21 Ignition Node Module IGNM If Equipped 12 Rearming Of The System 0 21 Keyless Ignition Node KIN If Equipped 13 To Arm TheSystem 00000008 21 Key BOD auos esse toa ba a E eR oed edes 14 To Disarm The System 200 21 Removing Key Fob From Ignition 16
34. 00000000 6 GVWR acr Wik eee dera t Ware ah eee e s 567 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 6 6 6 0 eee eee 472 Hazard Warning Flasher 04 607 Headliehts i sss a egos aka ons 722 Automate s aces wer aae heri eee aedis 169 Cleanmg sues ed e de Ug tal eds nag gie 706 High Beam stesse eR eedcnbs sabes 179 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 179 PASSING ascx kane eoe y ERO dome Pique aoe s 179 SWitCh ius dc eed E Rete SER e eG 169 Head Restraints Heated Mirtots se ieia i asie oe y ye RR aes 144 lou RD Tr 338 Heater Engine Block 4 2 RR Rs 375 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 179 Hill Descent Control 0 0 0 0 000000200 511 Hill Descent Control Indicator 511 Hitches Trailer LOWING 23k sace xv wna oo a ele 575 EOoisimig uisus Cin tae eae aS eee ra 649 Hood Release 2 2 2 0 000 ee ee 166 Hub Capsi ia odtsnc ve oen qa dene domed 626 TENIO y poniai aeres x oes y De SR ORAE De Sia dese n 16 Key iesu ami Pais a isa riso emque de rides 12 Ignition Key Removal llle 16 Illuminated Entry 0 6 ee eee 22 Immobilizer Sentry Key 005 18 Infant Restraint 2 20 0 00002 eee eee eee 89 Inflation Pressure Tires llle els 544 en INDEX 769 Inside Rearview Mirror leeren 136 Instrument Cluster 0 ee eee ee 275 Instrument Panel and Controls 273
35. 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Restraint System 7 Anchor Tether Ws LATCH The next generation of child safety M J 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information LATCH Positions For Installing Child Res
36. A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Fuel Filler Cap NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Continued 566 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued WARNING Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Static electricity can cause an ignition of flammable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce risk of serious injury or death when filling containers e Always place container
37. Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Headlamps With Wipers When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Automatic High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selecti
38. If Equipped The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn OFF Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or a Uconnect system screen Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features or Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control If Equippe
39. Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 707 Integrated Trailer Brake Controls 583 Interior Appearance Care eisses dcan mamisa 705 Interior Lights 5 222 eL etm wa 174 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 180 Introduction x esset a oa es Paes xs 4 Inverter Outlet 115V a 00 0 20 0 0000 231 Jack Location 2 0 0c ee eee 608 Jump Starting s ao nee aiea i a ea 650 Key In Reminder llle 18 Keyless Enter N Go llle 42 Keyless Entry System sesatron irus res 23 Key Programming gt e fsa eda ae e ue y 20 Key Replacement iuuenes ain sae Gta i am 19 KEYS ciue ta a La EAA ee Pa nays dae Le Meee 12 Key Sentry Immobilizer 04 18 Lane Change and Turn Signals 178 Lane Change Assist 4 sb X beg eres 179 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0000000004 55 Latchies 4 4 69 tepi bea Eden S GA RE ES s 128 Lead Free Gasoline l l 560 Leaks Fluid lt 6 40 4 ier Oe bee VUE MEA 128 Lite of IDr68 iusserat a a a pte eee a 542 Light Bulbs eser Ga one eed eme trees 128 Lights iussa a peser acr EG eA EX E RR Ee 128 PIMA cm 77 Alarm 2i0222ek ee eae iat entru 280 Anti Eock 4 seis pe wbPRS ROSE EE SS 275 Anti Lock Warning llle 504 Automatic Headlights 0 169 Brake Assist Warning 205 519 Brake Warning 770 INDEX eee Bulb Replacement 0000000 722 Instrument Cluster e cesa iene
40. See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed STARTING AND OPERATING 589 ar dn E Mee f o O Es O eae O oo oa 7 9 m 057003766 057003765 Four Pin Connector Seven Pin Connector 1 Female Pins 4 Park 1 Battery 5 Ground 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes 590 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE select TOW HAUL mode or select a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS switches NOTE Using TOW HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear range using the ERS switches while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low speeds 20 mph 32 km h or below holding your vehicle in first gear using the ERS switches can help to avoid transmission overheating
41. Starting And Operating Trailer Name When this feature is selected the Trailer name can be selected from 16 names To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 Calibrate Compass Oil Temp Refer to Compass Display for more information e Time Compass Variance e Range To Empty RTE Refer to Compass Display for more information e Average MPG Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items e Current MPG Odometer e Trip A e 000 e Trip B e 000 0 e Trailer Trip distance only Upper Left e Trailer Brake Gain None Upper Right e Compass e None Outside Temp default setting Compass default setting Trans Temp Outside Temp 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Trans Temp Outside Temp Oil Temp Trans Temp e Time Oil Temp Range To Empty RTE e Time e Average MPG e Range e Current MPG e AVG MPG e Trip A e Current MPG e Trip B e Trailer Brake Gain e Trailer Trip distance only Lower Right e Trailer Brake Gain None default setting Lower Left Compass e None default setting Outside Temp e Compass Trans Temp es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Oil Temp e Time e Range e AVG MPG e Current MPG e Trailer Brake Gain Restore To Defaults Restores All
42. The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is nec essary for maintaining control of the vehicle The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is indicated by a flashing off road light and solid on road light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will attempt to return to the Off Road mode To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4HI or 4LO as shown in Four Wheel Drive Operation and press the right hand Off Road stabilizer sway bar button to obtain the Off Road position The amber indicator light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to the On Road mode press the left hand On Road stabilizer sway bar button 452 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to On Road mode vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of co
43. The glove box door will automatically open ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Upper Glove Box Lower Glove Box To open the lower glove box pull on the handle to release the latch and lower the door 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Storage Rear Door Storage Crew Cab Front Door Storage If Equipped Storage compartments are located in both the driver and Storage areas and bottle holders drivers side only are passenger dorin qrun parels located in the door trim panels 035205819 035205815 Rear Door Storage Front Door Storage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 Center Storage Compartment If Equipped WARNING The center storage compartment is located between the driver and passenger seats The storage compartment This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the provides an armrest and contains both and upper and armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle lower storage area operation or a collision Only use the center seat ing position when the armrest is fully upright e In a collision the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs 4 5 kg These items could be thrown about endangering occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 Ibs 4 5 kg Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise the cover The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt power outle
44. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver s seat cushion There are two WARNING power seat switches that are used to control the move XI e ment of the seat cushion and the seatback e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 030905752 Power Seat Switches 1 Power Seat Switch 2 Power Seatback Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rea
45. Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On Gear Not Available e Washer Fluid Low Shift Not Allowed e e Service Air Suspension System Normal Ride Height Achieved Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse e e Autostick Unavailable Service Required e Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved Entry Exit Ride Height Achieved Selected Ride Height Not Permitted e e Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake Trans Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool Transmission Cool Ready to Drive Trailer Brake Disconnected e Service Air Suspension System Immediately 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e e e e e e Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance Entry Exit Watch For Clearance Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For jacking And Tire Change Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height Stop Start Ready If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Hood Open If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Battery Charging If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Trailer Tow Haul Selected If Equipped e e e e Stop Start Not Ready 4WD Low Range Selected If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Fuel Level Low If Equipped St
46. Window LOCKOUT Switch 4 Door Models Only The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver s door Window Lockout Switch allows you to disable the window control on the front passenger and rear passenger doors To disable the window controls on the front passenger and rear passen ger doors press the window LOCK button into the 021970067 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Front seat belts may incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occu pant energy during an impact event Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e Supplemental Sea
47. a passing vehicle is needed push the washer knob located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the first detent and release The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shie
48. an alternate Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL must be provided 038106533 Utility Rail End Cap ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 EASY OFF TAILGATE To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or RKE the electrical connector must be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate Disconnecting the Rear Camera or Remote Keyless Eniry If Equipped 1 Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or RKE predia hn located on the rear sill Connector Bracket 2 Remove the connector bracket from the sill by press ing inward in the locking tab 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 036906362 Locking Tab 3 Disconnect the chassis wiring harness ensuring the connector bracket does not fall into the sill 4 Connect the chassis plug and bracket provided in the glove box to the chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket back into the sill 5 Connect the tailgate plug provided in the glove box to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the terminals do not corrode Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the forward facing surface of the tailgate This will pre vent damaging the connector and bracket when stor ing or reinstalling the tailgate Removing The Tailgate 1 2 Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and or power locks if equipped
49. conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand 454 STARTING AND OPERATING Se mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn t When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use Low Range When driving off road shift into 4L Low Range for additional traction or to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the lower gearing low range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down hills with improved control and less effort Also use 4L Low Range in rain ice snow mud sa
50. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 To Manually Turn On The Stop Start System 1 Press the STOP START Off switch located on the switch bank 2 The light on the switch will turn off System Malfunction If there is a malfunction in the STOP START system the system will not shut down the engine A SERVICE STOP START SYSTEM message will appear in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information The system will need to be checked by your authorized dealer ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord 1500 Models The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp assembly It is located between the front grill and the radiator but underneath the black upper seal 2500 3500 Models The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by the right front tow hook It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered strap It also has a c clip that is used for storage when not 376 STARTING AND OPERATING Se in use for the winter months During winter months AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on C
51. further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines A that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press 672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte
52. in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS switches refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures 22 F 30 C or below transmission operation may be modified depend ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission may operate only in certain gea
53. move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into RE VERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ME vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section Pressing the ERS switches on the shift lever while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by l
54. not turn on when the seat is already warm Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driv er s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF auf NOTE Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will a
55. raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm The vehicles theft alarm can be armed disarmed by pressing the passive entry key fob lock unlock buttons if equipped To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grab The Door Handle To Unlock 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regard
56. remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 022670244 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad 2 Knee Bolster vanced Front Air Bags eb NOTE The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle s
57. rotated or replaced clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer 648 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 060505399 Oiling Location Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the inner and outer wheels Align these slots when assem bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the inner wheel The tires of both dual wheels must be completely off the ground when tightening to ensure wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping Dual wheel models require a special heavy duty lug nut tightening adapter included with the vehicle to cor rectly tighten the lug nuts Also when it is necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels use a proper vehicle lifting device NOTE When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear wheel end combination the tire diameter of the two individual tires must be compared If there is a significant difference the larger tire should be installed in a front location The correct direction of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows 060505400 Tightening Pattern 1 Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a snug fit WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 649 2 Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the torques listed in the table Go through the sequence a second time to verify that specific torque has been achieved Retighten to specific
58. the 4WD AUTO mode can be used In this mode the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels Four wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Because the front axle is en gaged this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft forcing the front 430 STARTING AND OPERATING Se and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for spe cific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button with a ballpoint pen or similar object located in the center of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD 4LOW and 4WD AUTO are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the c
59. the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible
60. 681 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and san explode injuring you Other tme unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 682 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed
61. 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio Manual Climate Controls Without Touch Screen If Equipped The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 Front Blower Cont
62. 8 8 8 8 8 8 a lol lelols s N eo S o e eo e E o v o oo r Wwrzle 9s ala 3 Change automatic transmission few fluid and filter six speed auto X aa matic only Id Inspect the transfer case fluid P change for any of the following X L police taxi fleet or frequent Ij trailer towing EE Change the transfer case fluid X 8 Inspect and replace PCV valve if X necessary The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 747 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N c I S e H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or FOR YOUR VEHICLE 04 751 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 753 Prepare For The Appointment 751 Service Contract g mra Eee ae ue Maw 753 Prepare A List ss cope RR EE 751 MH WARRANTY
63. AND OPERATING 435 3 While still rolling press the desired position on the NOTE 4 transfer case control switch After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure T 2 Bring the vehicle to complete stop With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Press the desired position on the transfer case control switch After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear e If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing 436 STARTING AND OPERATING AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM 1500 MODELS ONLY IF EQUIPPED Description The air suspension system provides full time load level ing capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button 05817
64. Compartment Identification 668 Coolant Antifreeze lle 734 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 00 00 000 a 125 Flooded Starting 000 369 Fuel Requirements 560 Jump Starting llle eee 650 Oils 3 24 dees othe one aha sore dG athe 4 a5 404 675 Oil Filler Cap secet r9 Ie rx X 677 OilSelection llle 676 Oil Synthetic lt 3 aute reb m rSh m d 678 Overheating x sees ed aee ER eae as 607 Engine Oil Viscosity sess ox iem ex hoe e es 677 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart llle 677 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 80 Entry System Illuminated 22 Ethanol 2 sure Pane ata Pee erus 561 Event Data Recorder so sis aua eem ae ai paa 88 Exhaust Gas Caution is pegas Rus 125 Exhaust System e sssusa esp PER ieee ees 125 Exterior Lighting i sess cement 169 Exterior Lights i seas e na 128 Filters Ait Cleaner uec takes oe re e pd 679 Engine Ole 4s ea doe Rb ege ae ates 678 Engine Oil Disposal llle 678 Flashers Tur Signal soph ue soared waa Sos entr a Sue enis 128 Flat Tire St wage creed cx aedes em eta 622 Flooded Engine Starting 205 369 en INDEX 767 Fluid Brake au oS aces beta Sows ae o eei d aed 736 Fluid Capacities 5 ees Saeed alk BS edis 732 Fid Leaks iuo ierant dee aoe 128 Fluid Level Checks Brake xe dish EE E ee de Reed esee A 694 Power Steering ns eee si ane eod 499 Fluids Lubricant
65. Distribution Center Fuses 3 Engine Oil Fill 9 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 2500 3500 Models Only 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Battery 670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 4L 0745005289 1 Coolant Pressure Bottle 6 Battery 2 Transmission Dipstick 7 Power Distribution Center PDC 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Washer Solvent 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Air Cleaner Filter ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
66. E e t co o r T r T T r N N N Cy Inspect the brake linings replace X X X X X X X ed as necessary E x parking brake as neces X X X X X X X P Inspect transfer case fluid X X X i Additional Maintenance E Replace engine air filter X X X X X 8 Replace spark plugs X 3 6L engine Replace spark plugs X 5 7L engine en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 745 5 Mileage or time passed o o o e eo e o o e 2 E Ss 2 l whichever comes first 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 3 2 8 8 8 oe R S 9 r9 zz MH Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers B s Ss E Sg Ss S S S 2888285s8s8 858 8 8 8 8 8E S F s s sl PEL 8 SIJS E S98 8 s s E Replace spark plugs X S 6 4L engine Cc Flush and replace the engine H coolant at 10 years or 150 000 X X E miles 240 000 km whichever T comes first L Change automatic transmission E fluid and filter s six speed auto S matic only if using your vehicle X 8 for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing L 746 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES x A Mileage or time passed o o o oeo eo o o o 2 e 2 2 N whichever comes first 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 S8 8 88 y gt gt gt y gt 5 5 e e e e e e d amp 8 9 8 8 8 S8 8 9 2 s5 9 s Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o e o eo 2 2 2 2 S 2 2 2 2 e 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
67. ER RES 146 Trailer and Tongue Weight 578 Wiring scacis a hedrI 3g e wk RE E raner 588 Trailer Towing Guide ossos coa casaco crearti 576 Trailer Weight uus sci dE eho as ee aes 576 Transfer Case sc aoe da wa ces eee Gears a aed 697 Electronically Shifted 00 0 416 Idi e I 736 Transmission llle 379 Automatic raci Boas tta lk Boras popia eii eE EEE 379 778 INDEX ee Fid sos hE Seok bates Sane se Chee EE 736 Maintenance 0 0 0 ee 698 Shif ng ies cbt a keep EE RES n 376 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 30 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 23 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 23 Tread Wear Indicators sees 542 Turn Signals coss sed nre RR Cee eae ER 178 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 757 Unleaded Gasoline llle 560 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 63 Utility Rails Rear Cargo Area sess 260 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 0 000000 530 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storages uae ka cde ex ee e ea 357 Viscosity Engine Oll seregei mm ex em e 677 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 275 Warnings and Cautions 0000005 6 Warranty Information 0005 755 Washers Windshield 00 000 eee 181 Washing Vehicle eps seca pe ee 209
68. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 034771465 Power Outlet Upper Lid Power Outlet Rear Center Console e Rear of the center console storage compartment The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply Quad Cab or Crew Cab power when the key is in the ON RUN or ACC posi tions ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 All accessories connected to the outlet s should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outl
69. Genuine Part Engine Oil 6 4L For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API categories of SN The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil UltraTM 0W 40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meet ing the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12633 for use in all operating temperatures Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR brand Engine Oil Filters Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 6 4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm 736 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engines 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended Fuel Selection 6 4L Engines 87 Octane Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Eight Speed Automatic We recommend you use only MOPAR ZF 8 amp 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Automatic Transmission Six Speed Automa
70. IN EMERGENCIES 615 Preparations 4 Place the shift lever into PARK On four wheel drive 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or ee meer rae eee aoe slippery areas 5 Turn the ignition OFF Block both the front and rear of the WARDINE wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if the right front Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the wheel is being changed block the left vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when rear wheel operating the jack or changing the wheel 060505162 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle mm 3 Set the parking brake when the vehicle is being jacked 616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Jack Instructions 1500 Series WARNING Continued WARNING Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued jack Do not get under the vehicl
71. If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the automatic trans mission fluid and filter s as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing 6 speed automatic only Tow Haul Mode To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or select a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS switches on more severe grades ee STARTING AND OPERATING 591 Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Air Suspension System To aid in attaching detaching the trailer from the vehicle the air suspension system can be used Refer to Air Suspension System in Starting and Operat
72. Light If Equipped Fach tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when th
73. Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 525 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits 526 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 ti
74. Mode 1500 Only If Equipped When this feature is selected the Ride Height will auto matically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Tire Jack Mode If Equipped When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Transport Mode If Equipped When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Wheel Alignment Mode If Equipped Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to your authorized dealer for further information Horn with Remote Lower If Equipped When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER but ton is pressed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears ne
75. NOTE The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured at the front of the box without removing completely To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps I 2 7 Lower the tailgate Pull down on the clamp on both driver and passenger sides Pick up on the cover and fold it back into the second panel Be sure both clamps are pushed completely down Pick up on the cover and fold it back into the third panel Once in the third panel position pull down on the clamp on both sides Be sure to clip both straps together to insure the cover stays together With two people remove the cover UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 036774432 Clamped Position Semi Clamped Position NOTE If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0367001173 Released Position Stowage Strap NOTE Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded completely before removing es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 Tri Fold Tonneau Cover Installation And Cleaning Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and push the Cover forward against the front of the truck bed The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on the vehicle Disengage the stowage straps and unfold the Tonneau Cover then attach the rear clamps to the truck bed flange to secure the Tonneau Cover to the vehicle The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the clam
76. On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Trailer Brake Phone Bluetooth Suspension SriusXM Setup and System Infor mation NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete either press the Back Arrow soft key or the Back hard key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you ma
77. REI 703 Water Driving Through ence eme 472 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0 5 704 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 704 Wheel Cover 2 0 00000 eee eee ee 626 Wheel Nut Torque sce RR ERRRES 627 Manche coe ae be UPS Fa EAS Rd 476 ACCOSSOMES cia duns eee EAT SOSUNPES Sd 480 Operation a osse eiie d ope gn d 482 Rigging Techniques 0 00000005 494 DT IM 476 en INDEX 779 Wind Buffetitig ss sng ew weed or neha a 51 Window Fogging 2 0 e 357 WindOoWSs 1 2 14 ydo edu ed S ae P EP CR e 47 POWER zx idea ERE Baa dented ok ae 47 Rear Siding ii aces Saath eee See Se ee 244 Windshield Defroster 0 00002 126 Windshield Washers llle 180 Ehud esr ak ot sae dP erences aoe Gene he IM ME 180 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 683 Windshield Wipers s e mc my Rm em 180 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 683 Wipers Intermittent lees 180 Wipers Rain Sensitive casin tacas 182 780 INDEX M INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible Th
78. STARTING AND OPERATING EENENEEEEEEEAINIIAMNINIIIEE NN DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the following Caution safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warning before doing so Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Alwa
79. This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar e Oil Pressure Warning Light 7 This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is cr high If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light y This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when th
80. To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the door locks are activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all d
81. To reset the power folding mirrors Fold and unfold them by pressing the button This may require multiple button pushes This resets them to their normal position Power Mirror Controls Location The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 q To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right button to select the mirror that you want to adjust Power Mirror Controls 1 Mirror Select Buttons 2 Four Way Mirror Control Switch 030405625 Power Mirror Movement 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated Mirrors If Equipped Fete These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Some vehicles may not be equipped with rear window defroster in this case the heated mirrors will still function as intended Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped Illuminated vanity mirrors are located
82. Trailer Weight Class III Bumper Hitch 1500 Model 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV 1500 Model 10 450 Ibs 4 740 kg Class V 2500 3500 Models 17 000 Ibs 7 711 kg Gooseneck 3500 Model Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drive train 30 000 Ibs 13 636 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 576 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to a 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Ram 1500 4x2 ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 3 6L V 6 8 Speed Auto matic Transmission Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 6 500 Ibs 2 948 kg Max Payload 1 910 Ibs 866 kg Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 6 500 Ibs 2 948 kg Max Payload 1 890 Ibs 857 kg 5 7L HEMI V 8 6 Speed Automatic Transmission Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 10 450 lbs Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 10 450 Ibs Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 10 300 Ibs 4 4 740 kg 4 740 kg 672 kg Max Payload 1 730 Ibs Max Payload 1 700 Ibs Max Payload 1 570 Ibs 785 kg 771 kg 712 kg ee STARTING
83. VEHICLE 701 NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at 60 70 F 16 21 C Only use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid level after a transmission service or fluid change Re check the fluid level and adjust as required once the transmission reaches normal operating tempera ture CAUTION If the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading Run the engine at idle in PARK to warm the fluid 8 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Fluid And Filter Changes Eight Speed Transmission Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required How ever change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason 702
84. When enabled active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zones Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and Continued 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage Park View should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow
85. With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE tr
86. a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Continued 582 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Towing Requirements Tires e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with el
87. a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the axles To unlock the rear axle move the axle locker switch to AXLE UNLOCK The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear axle is unlocked 450 STARTING AND OPERATING STABILIZER SWAY BAR SYSTEM POWER WAGON ONLY Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations Due to the use of taller springs this vehicle has an increased ride height of approximately 1 9 in 48 3 mm in the front and 1 5 in 38 1 mm in the rear A major advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect it has on approach departure and break over angles This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar switch located on the instrument panel AXLE UNLOCK d K FRONT REAR LOCK S p SWAY BAR 052307134 1 On Road 2 Off Road The switch has two positions On Road and Off Road The system is normally in the On Road mode indicated by a solid green light The stabilizer sway bar should remain in the On Road mode during normal driving conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury or death
88. adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Infants and Tod Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint dlers younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear height or weight limits of th
89. aeaa 0 00005 275 Cap Top Clearance 233 ameoa eia nieg 729 Interiot ies d Gh ne ee Qo OR Rie 174 Cargo cited Tarta ba pi PS RARI IN RE rias 177 Oil Pressure so 2 i cod id e e EE ORT 280 Center Mounted Stop 005 727 Passing esser kar ee eae RORIS OR en ots 179 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 276 Seat Belt Reminder sosea reses toeau tenete 279 Courtesy Reading 00 00000 175 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 280 Daytime Running ss sis eve renes 170 SEVICE sud a p a dk Ps Red ERE s 720 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 519 Side Marker 0 00000 00000000 731 EXteriot ouvert etes Eme ar s A Rte aes 128 SmartBeams sve e ra eer ee EA 171 LOB s sod pag ee dt ager ee qu ede tetas 173 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 280 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 416 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 281 Hazard Warning Flasher 607 Traction Control 6 6 6 6 eee 519 Headlights 2435 sue Oe eee oe bored eae 169 Transter Case cores ahaa he oe REOR aes 416 High Beam os eode ue wens ag nay a 179 Turn Signal uc dc ub epe Soa ay s 128 High Beam Indicator lille 279 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 275 High Beam Low Beam Select 179 Limited Slip Differential 470 Hill Descent Control Indicator oli Loading Vehicle es es 567 Illuminated Entry sese tem
90. and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679 quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPARQ engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance
91. and rearward to prevent dam age It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full rearward position to resist damage when entering a car wash or a narrow location rs UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped If equipped with power folding mirrors they can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in press the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the home position If the mirror does not electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive drag Power Folding Mirror Switch 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors Power Mirrors If Equipped You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the The controls for the power mirrors are located on the following occurs driver s door trim panel The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding The mirrors are accidentally manually folded unfolded The mirrors come out of the unfolded position The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds
92. at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway 054903773 1 US DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 522 STARTING AND OPERATING Em NOTE e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric e tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT E STAR
93. bags during impacts that Label Location require air bag occupant protection ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury e If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropriate s
94. bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position 698 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom mended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New
95. brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Continued Continued 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmis sion is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the
96. but ton is pressed Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Flash Lights with Remote Lower When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER button is pressed twice This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lower feature selected Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Suspension Display Messages When All is selected all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed When Warnings Only is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed e Automatic Aero Mode When this feature is selected the Ride Height will auto matically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Tire Jack Mode When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to the feature showing the system has been activa
97. button to enter the Screen Setup sub menu The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features For vehicles equipped a 3 5 EVIC screen Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the UP and DOWN button until Per sonal Settings displays in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to display one of the following choices E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 For vehicles equipped with a 7 EVIC screen and not equipped with a Uconnect 8 4 radio Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Use the UP or DOWN button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to Enter Vehicle Settings Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices NOTE Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with the following settings Language When in this display you may select one of six languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espafiol French Frangais Italian Ger
98. by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants Front Driveshaft Lubrication 2500 3500 Four Wheel Drive Models Ram Trucks Only Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Use MOPAR Type MS 6560 lithium based grease or equivalent Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into th
99. cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 11 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individu ally adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demis ter outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Flo
100. dial to engage and disengage the Child Protection locks When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses 022605852 Child Lock Control WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE e After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in STARTING AND OPERATING This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 NOTE e e e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been
101. ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the Remote Linked to Memory feature through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 NOTE If a memory profile has not already been set refer to Programming The Memory Feature for instruc tions on how to set a memory profile 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by following steps 1 4 above and press ing the UNLOCK button instead of LOCK on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the El
102. eta ese foe a 598 366 STARTING AND OPERATING es STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belt The starter should not be operated for more than 15 second intervals Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location acces sible to children A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Normal Starting Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key fob to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key fob to the OFF position wait five seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be press
103. etie M lI PARKSENSEG REAR PARK ASSIST ParkSense Sensors llle 200 IE EQUIPPED 14 tisia gresie k ekinean aa 191 ParkSense Warning Display 201 ParkSense Sensors amine tnut prib dE maa 191 ParkSense Display lesen 201 ParkSense amp Warning Display 192 Enabling And Disabling Front And Or ParkSense Display ccce 192 Rear ParkSense 1 2 ee 203 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense 196 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System 204 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist Cleaning The ParkSense System 205 System s se e atens adan nede ep hedera 196 ParkSense System Usage Precautions 205 Cleaning The ParkSense System 197 W PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ParkSense System Usage Precautions 197 IE EQUI a a 2 208 Turning ParkView On Or Off With Uconnect 5 0 3 cscs ae bes aa Mee eas 210 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Turning ParkView On Or Off With Troubleshooting Tips se teti e oea e ae 221 KONER CALDER iga aa a m General Information 0 222 Lus ep d erri Pd ou B POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 255 ll OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED 211 Opening Surasoncddtantud Mods Courtesy Reading Lights 212 Ca a Manual Mo
104. first 2500 3500 Models Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or twelve months on 2500 3500 trucks whichever comes first Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environ ment This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering 2500 3500 Models Only and automatic transmission six speed only as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 l 742 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES SS Required Maintenance At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil sm Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following Change Indicator System J pages for required maintenance e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil e Inspect engine cooling system protection and Change Indicator System hoses e Change oil and filter e Inspect exhaust system e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on e Inspect engine air cleaner if using i
105. free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 30 40 km h and squeeze the manual brake control lever com pletely If the trailer wheels lockup indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting ee STARTING AND OPERATING 587 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is ata point EVIC Display Messages just below trailer wheel lockup If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display messages along with a single chime will be displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer connection Light Heavy Light Heavy Electric Electric EOH EOH trailer brake control or on the trailer Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Type of Electric Electric Electric Electric Trailer Trailer Trailer over over Hy draulic Trailer Trailer Brakes Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the Brakes ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss Load Under Above Under Above of trailer braking There may be a increase in stop 10 000 Ibs 110 000 Ibs 10 000 Ibs 10 000Ibs ping distance or trailer instability which could result in damage to your vehicle trailer o
106. from previous vehicles getting slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more stuck As a good practice before entering any mud than a 4 turn quickly back and forth while still hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely bite and help maintain your momentum recovered if stuck e Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand using the appro priate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle s mo mentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to air the tires back up prior to reducing the pressure 456 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers
107. h If these conditions are not met while attempt ing to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator lamp will flash on off EVIC Green Telltales e Electronic Speed Control SET This telltale will illuminate green when the elec tronic speed control is SET For further informa tion refer to Electronic Speed Control in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Selectable Menu Items Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the EVIC Digital Speedometer Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow SPEED button until the Digital display icon is high lighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to change the display between km h and mph Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow EE button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed Press the LEFT or SELECT RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the following information sub menus Air Suspension If Equipped Transmission Temperature Automatic Transmission Only Oil Temp Oil Life Multimeter UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Tire Pressure Monitoring System 1500 amp 2500 Series Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Tire Pressure is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button a
108. handle then position the seatback in the desired position 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped The seat is divided into three segments The outboard seat portions are each 40 of the total width of the seat On some models the back of the center portion 20 easily folds down to provide an armrest center storage compartment Mega Cab Rear Seat Features Reclining Rear Seats If Equipped The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion To adjust the seatback lift upward on the handle lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired position release the handle LS 230907362 Rear Seat Recliner Handle WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Folding Rear Seat Table Mode If Equipped Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down and used as a table To fold down either rear seatback 1 Lift the handle located next to the head restraint Table Mode Handle 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Fold the seatback forward Folding Rear Seat If Equipped Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward when the seatback is folded flat WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or out
109. horizontally to secure the side 5 Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure gates in the closed position the panel into place and assist against theft 0367 706568 036706567 y 036 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Divider Position The divider position is intended for managing your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the bed There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels which allow for various positions to assist in managing your cargo To install the bed extender into a divider position per form the following 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates 036706665 Center Handle And Lock 1 Center Handle Lock 2 Handle 2 With the side gates open position the extender so the outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides of the bed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 036706570 Aligning Gate To Slots Side Gates Closed 3 Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends 5 Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place are secured into the intended slots of the bed and assist against theft 4 Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed position 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Extender Position The extender position allows you to load the bed of the truck beyond
110. ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView amp On Or Off With Uconnect amp 5 0 1 Press the Settings button 2 Press the Safety amp Assistance soft key 3 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable Turning ParkView On Or Off With Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN 1 Press the Settings soft key 2 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 3 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Turning ParkView Camera Delay On Or Off OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED With Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN The overhead console is located on the headliner above 1 Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the review mirror The overhead console contains the the Uconnect display following features 2 Press the Settings soft key Courtesy Reading Lights m 3 Press the Parkview Backup Camera Delay soft key Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped to turn the ParkView Backup Camera Delay system Power Sliding Rear Window Switch If Equipped SUMMER Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped NOTE A check mark will appear in the selection box to indicate the system is turned ON 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHI
111. if you must leave the vehicle 394 STARTING AND OPERATING Se DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first and sec ond gears direct third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions To access all six available gears you must use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control described below When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
112. ignition switch from the OFF posi tion to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion e When shifting into PARK pull the shift lever toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 406 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or drivi
113. in OFF position When leaving the vehicle always lock your ve hicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE Keyed Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC when the driver door is open Keyless Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN when the driver door is open If equipped with Electronic Vehicle I
114. is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD AUTO Four Wheel Drive Auto Range This range sends power to the rear wheels The four wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Additional traction for varying road conditions 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation 428 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Shifting Procedure e If all the requirements to select a new transfer case NOTE position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case will flash until the transfer case completes the shift position have not bee
115. is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade NOTE On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued 382 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running B
116. is selected from the Customer Pro grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or from the Uconnect Sys tem if available Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features or Uconnect Settings if available in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and or right rear regions based on the object s distance and location relative to the vehicle If an object is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single solid arc in the left and or right rear region and the system will produce a tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1 2 second tone to slow to fast to continuous UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
117. manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 753 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 866 726 4636 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehic
118. not be compatible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information STARTING AND OPERATING 573 057003770 057003769 EXAMPLE Without Weight Distributing Hitch EXAMPLE With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Incorrect 574 STARTING AND OPERATING Fifth Wheel Hitch The fifth wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed It connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer with a coupling king pin Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted os7003768 OVET the rear axle in the truck bed EXAMPLE Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect ee STARTING AND OPERATING 575 Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight Fifth Wheel 2500 3500 Models 25 000 Ibs 11 339 kg Gooseneck 2500 Model 20 000 Ibs 9 071 kg Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight Hitch Type Max Trailer Hitch Max
119. not in use 054000978 LU 11 Check your anchor Make sure all connections are secured and free of debris before continuing with the winching procedure STARTING AND OPERATING 489 12 Check wire rope The wire rope should be neatly wound around the spooling drum Improper wind ing can cause damage to the wire rope 064000980 ra In certain situations you may decide to throw a heavy blanket or similar object over the wire rope A heavy blanket can absorb energy should the wire rope break eee osaooosro Place it on the wire rope midway between the winch and m the anchor point Do this before the wire rope is put under tension Do not approach or move the blanket once tension is applied Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead If it is necessary to move or remove the blanket slack the tension on the wire rope first A eS 490 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 13 Establish no people zones Make your intentions 1 clear Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity surrounding the winching operation is completely aware of your intentions before you pull Declare where the spectators should not stand never behind or in front of the vehicle and never near the wire rope or snatch block Your situation may have other no people zones 054000981 No People Zones STARTING AND OPERATING 491 14 Begin winching With the winching vehicles engine on and light tension already on
120. of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Disconnect the negative cable from battery Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 721 Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Bulb Number replacement instructions For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for Projector Headlamp High Beam Premium Bi Halogen HIR2 Overhead Console TS 212 9 Projector Headlamp Lamps Low Beam Dome Lamp 7679 Premium Bi Halogen 9005 Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Front Turn Signal Lamp Premium Headlamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Base Quad Headlamp Base Quad Headlamp H11 Low Beam Base Quad Headlamp 9005 High Beam Front Turn Signal Lamp 3157NA Fog Lamp Horizontal 9145 shape Fog Lamp Vertical 9006 shape Center High Mounted 921 Stop Lamp CHMSL Rear Cargo
121. of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly NOTE The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 651 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or Positive Battery Post sparks away from the battery j 060809873 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 652 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the ae parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive 4 post of the discharged vehicle injury could result damage to the
122. of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 668 B MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 674 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 669 Engine Oil oes nee be 675 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 64L 670 Engine Oil Filter ssec neg 678 E ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 671 Engine Air Cleaner Filter sss 679 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 671 Maintenance Free Battery ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND Air Conditioner Maintenance MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 672 Front Driveshaft Lubrication 2500 3500 E REPLACEMENT PARTS 00 673 Four Wheel Drive Models Ram Trucks E DEALER SERVICE 000 00 sese 673 Uy seeeat she setdebitte tate whinge sand oe 666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Body Lubrication sss ssi ass agi e emi aega 682 Windshield Wiper Blades 683 Adding Washer Fluid 683 Exhaust System 0 0 00 e eae 684 Cooling System ss ii lees 687 Brake System eas lose cane eee ed 694 Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level ctc etes eret weg 696 Transfer C456 oc coq e
123. on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on auto matically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Slide On Rod Features Of Sun Visor If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun To use the Slide On Rod feature rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it Pull the sun visor along the Slide On Rod until the sun visor is in the desired position Slide On Rod Extender 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped NOTE Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to i ntering an m r wash These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror etenn an antomated cat was head to provide a greater vision range when towing A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror extra wide loads To change position inboard or out and can be adjusted separately board the mirror head should be rotated flipped in or out Blindspot Mirror Trailer Towing Position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 SEATS Driver s Power Seat If Equipped Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Some models may be equipped with an eight way power vehicle driver s seat
124. opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se START STOP OR ENGINE Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN NOTE For further information refer to Starting Proce dures in Starting And Operating Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 0202005021 020207436 Emergency Key Removal IGNM Emergency Key Removal Keyless Enter N Go Fob KIN NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side up 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission Turn the Ke
125. pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Checking Coolant Level 3 6L and 5 7L Engines With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant should be between the MIN and MAX range on the dipstick MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 691 To check the coolant level 1 Open the coolant reservoir 072639276 2 Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir neck 692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE u 072639277 3 Check the coolant level on the dipstick The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Checking Coolant Level 6 4L Engine The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the MIN and MAX range on the bottle when the engine is cold The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is
126. pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set pushbuttons es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight
127. refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C condenser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock The radiator drain cock is located in the lower radiator tank If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant expan sion bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRES SURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 688 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill CAUTION If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in eng
128. release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Press and hold close switch to fully close sunroof Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of
129. restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tig
130. restraint is located above the top of your ear Rear Passenger Fold Flat Seats 3 Lift the seatback to return the seat to the upright position Be sure the seat is locked in place UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjust ment button located on the base of the head restraint Rear Head Restraints and push downward on the head restraint The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re straints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Adjustment Button 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adjustment Button NOTE e The rear center head restraint Crew Cab and Quad Cab has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of a tether Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information
131. result of the system reverting to the base brake system and is normal Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning 504 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ABS Warning Light WARNING Continued The ABS includes an amber warning light Whenthelight The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system resulting from excessive speed in turns following reverts to standard non anti lock brakes another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning WARNING e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish ihe safety ol other their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just Hydraulic Brake Assist 2500 3500 Models Only press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to Except Power Wagon slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro the natural laws of physics from acting on the boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering System You may experience some clicking or hissing efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
132. satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When addi tional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 693 Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protec tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo nents Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hose
133. satisfied prior to attempting the shift then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel 4WD 4WD AUTO LOCK 4wp LOW NEUTRAL 051905843 Transfer Case Switch Five Position 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ME This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions Two wheel drive high range 2WD Four wheel drive automatic range 4WD AUTO e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD or four wheel drive position AWD AUTO for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD For variable driving conditions the 4WD AUTO mode can be us
134. section NOTE Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be lowered and placed in transport mode before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to Air Suspension in Starting and Operating for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the transport mode for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 661 speed transmission Wheel Lift Front Towing Wheels 2WD Models 4WD Models Condition OFF the Ground Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable See instructions in Recreational Tow e Transmission in NEUTRAL ing under Starting and Operating e 30 mph 48 km h max speed e Automatic Transmission in PARK e 15 miles 24 km max distance 6 Manual Transmission in gear NOT speed transmission NEUTRAL e 30 miles 48 km max distance 8 e Transfer Case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED mm or Dolly Rear OK NOT ALLOWED Tow Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
135. side of the seat The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached OGL Power Lumbar If Equipped Lumbar Control Switch Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Heated Seats If Equipped Front Heated Seats On some models the front and rear seats may be There are two heated seat switches as well as soft keys in equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions the radio that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each seat are WARNING located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the climate controls or in the radio unit Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus Red indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of tion or other p
136. stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console between the courtesy reading lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 WARNING e Never leave children unatte
137. switch column shift until D is once again displayed in the instrument cluster WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the shift lever to the left console shift or the ERS switch down column shift The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 CAUTION When using ERS for engine braking while descend ing steep grades be careful not to overspeed the engine Apply the brakes as needed to prevent en gine overspeed Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fourth and fifth gears The trans mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature e the engine coolant antifreeze has reached an ad equate temperature e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to
138. symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle 538 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the run flat mode A run flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below
139. system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 563 conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor Continued mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Us
140. the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximate
141. the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans mitter may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK Doors closed e Hood closed e HAZARD switch off e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed Fuel meets minimum requirement System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas c
142. the underside of the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click three or four times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 643 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 2500 And 3500 Series 1 Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug 2 Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn screw Snap tools into bracket assembly clips Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn the jack turn screw clockwise until jack is snug into bracket assembly 060573850 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 644 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 060574343 Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly Jack Hold Down Fastener 3 Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage NOTE Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly position holding the jack by the jack turn screw slip slides into the front hold down location the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor 4 Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan Reinstall the plastic cover Jack And Tools 2500 3500 Series WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
143. the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing 030471112 Automatic Dimming Mirror NOTE The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9 1 1 button located on the bottom of the mirror 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Assist Call Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other hicle issues The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push button MEME which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to one 9 1 1 Call of several predefined locations for immediate support Report an accident without taking your eyes off the road e Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire or needa Just press 9 1 1 on your mirror and connect tow just press the Assist button and you ll be con nected to someone who can help Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you re driving and its location Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror e Uconnect Access Customer Care In vehicle support Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access via Mo mirror clean bile features ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Display If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror insta
144. the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 655 CAUTION WARNING Continued explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow mission shifting occurring hooks mH
145. the wire rope begin winching slowly and steadily Be sure that the wire rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spool ing drum For additional assistance the winched vehicle can be slowly driven while being pulled by the winch Continue pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground If you are able to drive the vehicle the winching operation is complete Using The Remote Control NOTE e Avoid overheating the winch motor For extended winching stop at reasonable intervals to allow the winch motor to cool down e What to look for under load The wire rope must always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum rotation decal on the winch As you power in make sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the drum This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw ing into the inner wraps binding and damaging the wire rope Avoid shock loads by using the control switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack Shock loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire rope ratings During side pulls the wire rope tends to stack up at one end of the drum This stack can become large enough to cause serious damage to the winch So line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate To fix an uneven stack spool out that section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end of the drum which will free up space for continued winching 16 17
146. transmission 6 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until fluid level properly 1 Monitor the transmission temperature using the EVIC display and operate the vehicle as required to reach the normal operating temperature Park the vehicle on level ground Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 seconds and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion allowing time for the transmission to fully en gage in each position ending with the transmission in PARK seated Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature If the fluid level is low add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill Use ONLY the recommended fluid see Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts for fluid specifications After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level ee MAINTAINING YOUR
147. transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation Eight Speed Transmission The Electronic Range Select ERS switches allow the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will not shift above third gear except to prevent engine over speed but will shift down into second and first gears normally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shifter control is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the GEAR switch on the steering wheel will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the GEAR or GEAR switch will change the top available gear STARTING AND OPERATING 387 GEAR 2 GEAR ON OFF CANCEL 051269899 1 ERS Switch 2 ERS Switch To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the GEAR switch until D is once again displayed in the instru ment cluster WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury When to Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas to
148. vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not Before exiting a vehicle always turn the vehicle OFF apply the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmis sion into REVERSE and remove the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Power Door Locks If Equipped Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim dangerous for a number of reasons A child or panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 021870068 Power Door Lock Switch Location If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle Remov ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a remind
149. with a Full Bench rear seat 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Can two child restraints be at tached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor ages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be re moved es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 Mega Cab Standard Cab What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the LATCH an chorage system to attach the child restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt alone instead of the LATCH an chorage system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint No Do not use the seat belt w
150. you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety amp Driving Assistance After pressing the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key the following settings will be available e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To change the Park Assist status touch and release Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refe
151. 00 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 7076 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant 690 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage If H
152. 1263 Air Suspension Switch 1 Up Button 2 Down Button 3 Entry Exit Mode Indicator Lamp Customer se lectable ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 4 Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp Customer selectable 5 Off Road 1 Indicator Lamp Customer selectable 6 Off Road 2 Indicator Lamp Customer selectable NOTE The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 100 km h and 66 mph 106 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph 106 km h Normal Ride Height NRH This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving e Off Road 1 OR1 Raises the vehicle approximately 1 in 26 mm This position should be the primary position for all off road driving until Off Road 2 OR2 is needed A smoother and more comfortable ride will result To enter ORI press the Up button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 35 mph 56 km h When in the ORI position if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph 64 km h and 50 mph 80 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph 80 km h the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH Off Road 1 may not be available due to vehicle payload an EVIC message will be displayed when this occurs Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Pane
153. 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the Tire Pressure Monitoring Section for more infor mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 539 Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a spare tire please refer to TIREFIT KIT in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard
154. 3 Tether Anchor 116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat The tether strap should go between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint You may need to adjust the head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint and be tween its posts 3 Lift the cover if so equipped and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Mega Cab Tether Strap Mounting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING Right or Left Outboard Seats 1 Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop mE Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Quad Cab or Crew Cab Trucks The top tether an chorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located between the rear glass and the back of the rear seat There is a tether strap loop located behind each seating position Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap of the child restraint 022670227 Head Restraint In Raised Position 118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFOR
155. 3 Trip B Stop Start If Equipped Press and release Up amp Down arrow button A Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button I tripB until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the EVIC until the Stop Start icon is highlighted in the ae The Trip B information will display the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT following arrow button to display the Stop Start status e Distance Trailer Tow e Average Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow m EXE button until the Trailer Tow icon is highlighted ee Average Speed Press the SELECT RIGHT arrow button and e Elapsed Time the next screen will display the following trailer trip inf tion Hold the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to reset all the tp mformation information Trailer Trip e Trailer Brake 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Audio Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow aa button until the Audio display icon is high lighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to display the active source Stored Messages Press and release the UP arrow button until the Messages display icon is highlighted in the EVIC This feature shows the number of stored warning messages Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Screen Setup Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow
156. 48 km for 8 speed transmission tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly or when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 663 in the straight position with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe engine and or transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not cov ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Four Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL N and the transmis sion is in PARK for automatic transmissions or in gear NOT in Neutral for manual transmissions Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating for detailed instructions CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Towing this vehicle in violation
157. 492 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 15 Secure vehicle Once recovery of the vehicle is com plete be sure to secure the vehicle s brakes and shift the transmission to PARK Release tension in the wire rope Disconnect the wire rope and disconnect from the anchor Rewind the wire rope The person handling the wire rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through the hand control the winch at all times WARNING To prevent serious injury NEVER put your fingers inside the hook area as you are powering in STARTING AND OPERATING 493 NOTE How to spool under no load Arrange the re mote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and evenly layered Tighten and straighten the layer if necessary Keep the wire rope under light tension and spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even layers Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as necessary Repeat this process until the winch hook is the same distance as the full length of the remote control from the winch Pinch the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook strap Hold the hook strap between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead carefully spooling in the remaining wire rope By pulsing the remote control switch 18 Store the h
158. 5 Amp Switch Bank F88 15 Amp Instrument Panel Blue Instrument Cluster Blue Cluster F85 10 Amp Airbag Module F90 F91 20 Amp Power Outlet Rear Red Yellow seats Customer F86 10Amp Airbag Module welectable Red F93 20 Amp Cigar Lighter Yellow F94 10 Amp Shifter Transfer Case Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 719 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F95 10 Amp Rear Camera F99 10 Amp Climate Control Red Park Assist Red F96 10 Amp Rear Seat Heater F101 15 Amp Electrochromatic Red Switch Blue Mirror Smart F97 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats High Beams If Natural amp Heated Steering Equipped Wheel If F104 20Amp Power Outlets In Equipped Yellow strument Panel F98 25 Amp Front Heated Center Console Natural Seats If Equipped 720 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we recommend that you take the following steps to mini mize the drain on your vehicle s battery CAUTION e When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use
159. 54 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE PRESSURE message as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module Four TPM sensors Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare
160. 6 Description i ac dene ced RR CSS 436 Air Suspension Modes 4 440 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages 441 Operation i ssa eb ea Re ee 442 E AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM 2500 3500 MODELS ONLY IF EQUIPPED 443 Description iaces y em Re end 443 Air Suspension Modes isses 445 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Driving Through Water 4 461 EVIC Display Messages 446 Aiting Down For Off Road Driving 464 S euge iitopantigatep andina aie M Vehicle Recovery e ideae p Rex ded 465 ll AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM POWER WAGON T MODELS ONLY IF EQUIPPED 447 After Driving Off Road illus 469 E STABILIZER SWAY BAR SYSTEM B LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL 4 en 470 POWER WAGON ONLY iem xs 450 BI DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES A71 ll SAFE OFF ROAD DRIVING POWER Acceleration WAGON ONLY ese su de RE pPEER en 452 Traction s ere ea Gord acd a PER Rer d ed E E NBN E DRIVING THROUGH WATER 472 Characteristics oue 2440 4 eX oe bee aed 452 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 455 Flowing Rising Water 06 472 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other Shallow Standing Water 472 High POMS osor eas ee re dua dax ed 456 W
161. 645 Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground CAUTION Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear center caps Damage can occur to the center cap and or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used A pulling motion not a pry off motion is recom mended to remove the caps zm For single rear wheel SRW models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off Insert the blade end into the pry off notch and carefully pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion 646 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME On 3500 models with dual rear wheels DRW you must first remove the hub caps The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the rear hub caps Position the hook and pull out on the ratchet firmly The hub cap should pop off The wheel skins can now be removed For the front hub cap on models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the caps off The wheel skin can now be removed CAUTION e Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap damage to the hub cap finish may occur The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry off notches Make sure that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch before attempting to pull off You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the w
162. 70 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL The limited slip differential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During normal driving and cornering the limited slip unit per forms similarly to a conventional differential On slip pery surfaces however the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction The limited slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground You could lose control of the vehicle Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippe
163. 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever shift selector is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever shift selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park mes sage and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps 1 Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position 2 Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays ACC ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 3 Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time CAUTION to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the 4
164. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear seat Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child 2 seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the air bag system in this vehic
165. AND OPERATING 577 Ram 1500 4x4 ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 3 6L V 6 8 Speed Auto matic Transmission 5 7L HEMI V 8 6 Speed Automatic Transmission Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 6 300 Ibs 2 857 kg Max Payload 1 930 Ibs 875 kg Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 10 350 Ibs Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 6 250 Ibs 2 834 kg Max Payload 1 900 lbs 861 kg Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 10 350 Ibs Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 10 050 Ibs 4 4 694 kg 4 695 kg 558 kg Max Payload 1 490 Ibs Max Payload 1 470 Ibs Max Payload 1 400 Ibs 676 kg 667 kg 635 kg 578 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Ram 2500 And 3500 ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 5 7L HEMI V 8 6 Speed Max Towing 10 100 Ibs 4 Max Towing 12 300 lbs 5 i Automatic Transmission 581 kg 579 kg Max Payload 1 780 Ibs Max Payload 3 120 Ibs 1 807 kg 415 kg 6 4L HEMI V 8 6 Speed Max Towing 10 100 lbs Max Towing 12 300 lbs Automatic Transmission 4 581 kg 5 579 kg Max Payload 1 780 Ibs Max Payload 3 120 lbs 1 807 kg 415 kg NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website addresses e http www ramtrucks com e http www ramtruck ca Canada Trailer And Tongue Weight Always loa
166. ATING 543 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It
167. AUTION the c clip The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater has come de a complete slop and the engine deat idle speed e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 WARNING e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Be
168. AVAIL ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UN AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an object is detected within the five second pop up duration The car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN SORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE QUIRED message appears in the EVIC see an autho rized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e e When you turn Fro
169. Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or in the Uconnect Access 8 4 Radio If Equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Entry Exit Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 2 in 51 mm This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo To enter Entry Exit Mode press the Down button once from the NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph 53 km h Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 24 km h the vehicle height will begin to lower If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h for greater than 60 seconds or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the Entry Exit change will be cancelled To return to Normal Height Mode press the Up button once while in Entry Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph 24 km h Entry Exit mode may not be available due to vehicle payload an EVIC message will be displayed when this occurs Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Entry Exit mode may be achieved using your key fob for easier entry lo
170. And Lock The interior of the RamBox will automatically illumi nate when the lid is opened In addition to the automatic illumination switch there is a manual on off switch located at the rear of each storage bin Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights pushing the switch again will turn the lights back on RamBox Light Switch CAUTION Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time could cause the vehicle battery to discharge If the lid is required to stay open for extended periods of time Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 CAUTION Continued it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off manually using the on off switch Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs to allow water to drain from bins To remove plug pull up on the edge To install push plug downward into drain hole NOTE Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and shelf supports These accessories in addi tion to other RamBox accessories are available from MOPAR Locking And Unlocking RamBox Press and release the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock and unlock all doors the tailgate and the RamBox if equipped Refer to Remote Key less Entry for further details The RamBox storage bins can be locked using the vehicle key To lock and unlock the storage bin insert the key into the keyhole on the pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock or c
171. B during deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions except the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab front center seating position have combi nation lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts
172. CLE RKE transmitter if equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing on the corresponding lens 033371115 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights 031471116 Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position full right position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry Front Courtesy Reading Lights 031406003 Rear Passenger Courtesy Reading Light NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF they will automatically turn off after 15 minutes UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink chan nels 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME a W P 033906001 HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is act
173. Door Lock 41 Ei igy Managuuent Fonhitd i esaese recs 67 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 67 Event Data Recorder EDR 88 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Child Restraints 0 000004 BeltAlert 2 cee eee eee 67 E ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS eee ange amen ieee 95 NU GARETV TIPS Loetssendexe cerise test NEUE BEN EASED o gene hepi nE qoid id Transporting Passengers sess 124 iy UD D A NE 2 Piha Gba aes kei EISS OPEER ERES 125 Air Bag System Components 71 o oe d e MEM 126 Advanced Front Air Bag Features 72 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 76 Outside The Vehicle s aas cse 128 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or keyless ignition system The key start ignition system consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip in it or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an Ignition Node Module IGNM The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Ignition Node Module IGNM If Equipped The Ignition Node Module IGNM ope
174. E STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop O Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised Position 2 Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center seat Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119 4 Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop see NOTE If there are child seats in both of the outboard left diagram Tighten the tether strap according to the and right seating positions the tether strap hooks of child seat manufacturer s instructions both child seats should be connected to the center tether strap loop This is the correct way to tether two outboard child seats Center Seat 1 Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop 022670232 Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop 120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard tether str
175. EHICLE Se WARNING Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement op erate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever To stop the window from going all the way down during Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection 4 Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door Only If Equipped Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Au
176. Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 22 TOWIHAUL The TOW HAUL button is located on the center stack upper switch bank This light will illumi nate when TOW HAUL mode is selected 23 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped tw The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ee Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected TO HAUL 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg NOTE e e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activ
177. For maximum defogging select the outside air position e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection by pressing the A C button Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem perature Also make sure to select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes Stop Start System If Equipped While in an Autostop the Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Climate Controls With Touch Screen Soft Keys If Equipped Soft keys are accessible on the radio touch screen rma Hard Keys The hard keys are located below the radio touch screen 0456003147 Temperature Controls Soft keys Climate Controls Hard keys ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C
178. Front Air Bag Features WARNING The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate which may receive information from the front impact sensors if equipped Do not put anything on or around the air bag The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an covers or attempt to open them manually You may impact that requires air bag deployment This low output damage the air bags and you could be injured is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is because the air bags may no longer be functional used for more severe collisions The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat
179. G Winch Accessories The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch to anchors change direction of pull and for safe winching 054000967 Gloves Wire rope through use will develop barbs which can slice skin It is ex tremely important to wear protective gloves while oper ating the winch or handling the wire rope Avoid loose fit ting clothes or anything that could become entangled in the wire rope and other moving parts 054000968 Snatch Block Pulley Used properly the multi purpose snatch block allows you to 1 increase the winch s pulling power and 2 change your pulling direction without damaging the wire rope Proper use of the snatch block is covered in Before You Pull 054000969 Clevis D Shackles The D Shackle is a safe means of connecting the looped ends of cables straps and snatch blocks The shackle s pin is threaded to alow easy removal 054000970 STARTING AND OPERATING 481 Tree Trunk Protector Typi cally made of tough high quality nylon it provides the operator an attachment point for the winch rope to a wide variety of anchor points and objects as well as protect liv ing trees 482 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses Operating Your Winch WARNING Continued WARNING e Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep others away during winching Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding e Always keep hands and clothing clear of
180. HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer unless the TOW HAUL switch lo cated on the center stack is selected When activated the TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting and Operating for further information In order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver comfort while launching on a hill the system recognizes when the TOW HAUL switch is activated and compen sates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the hill WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the incline while resuming accelera tion manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is re sponsible for braking the vehicle Continued 510 STARTING AND OPERATING xe WARNING Continued HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK or us
181. INFORMATION 755 Be Reasonable With Requests 751 B MOPAR PARTS 000 755 Bl IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 752 Wi REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 755 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 753 In The 50 United States And Washington D C llle 755 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 753 In Mexico contact eee 753 In Canadas s qscisorere Re e dr e b dip ea 755 ra 750 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 756 Traction Grades cae ti are oea ta 00000 758 ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION Temperature Grades 0000 758 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES 757 Tread W Calls uu deux sats a edo tee eens 757 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 751 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor kn
182. ING 551 NOTE CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability 552 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monito
183. IRES GENERAL INFORMATION y mn M i shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued 534 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat terns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures f
184. Lamp 921 722 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Bulb Number LED Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL Cargo Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA Base Rear Tail Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K Premium Rear Tail Turn and Stop Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Premium Backup Lamp T20 Rear Lamp Bar ID 194 Marker Lamp Side Marker Lamps 194 Dual Rear Wheels Backup Lamp 921 Rear License Plate Lamp 194 BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Base Quad Premium Bi Halogen Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Front Park And Turn If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable 3 Remove the four plastic push in fasteners that secure the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender ledges 4 Remove the two plastic push in rivets that secure the upper radiator seal to the radiator MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 723 5 Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle 7 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel remove the fastener and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield Access to the r
185. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid And Filter Changes Six Speed Transmission Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter s if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 703 Washing e
186. Mounted Side Air Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats A 922610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se E NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners if equipped and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy 022606595 0 7 The system includes side impact sensors that are cali Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC brated to deploy the side air
187. N ie E S Cc H E D U L E S 8 740 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Oil Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 741 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip NOTE 1500 Models Only e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months on 1500 trucks whichever comes
188. NG YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 6 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 8 Temperature Control Down Button Push the button for cooler temperature settings On the touch screen slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings 9 Temperature Control Up Button Push the button for warmer temperature settings On the touch screen slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or CE high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recircul
189. NSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE NOTE The ParkSense system will automatically dis able when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module The EVIC will display PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled If the ParkSense switch is pressed and the system is disabled or requires service the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System During vehicle start up when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condi tion the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UN AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition
190. NTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result Outside Bulbs Cargo Lamps Inside Bulb Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing 073301016 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 729 Cab Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped 1 Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp b 073301018 3 Pull the bulb straight from it s socket and replace Lu 7 073301017 2 Rotate the socket turn and pull it from the lamp assembly 730 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 073301423 Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Dual Rear Wheels If 2 Turn the socket turn counterclockwise to access the Equipped bulb 1 Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the socket oy Bie Meese 4 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 731 Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels If 3 Turn the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove Equipped from assembly to access the bulb 4 Pull the bulb straight out from socket 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing 073301424 1 Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly 2 Pull the entire assembly from the fender 732 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES
191. OAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or
192. OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS 474 FEU Climbing err re aha sae Ead 459 After Driving Off Road o spamer rsata naes 474 362 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ll WINCH USAGE POWER WAGON ONLY B PARKING BRAKE aevi aed EROR 9 500 TEV esata ee ae ema sive Me B BRAKE SYSTEM xs eds hy IRE ER 502 TIRES tO now Berane Deine Out Manca at Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System 503 Understanding The Features Of Your Winch 478 Hydraulic Brake Assist 2500 3500 Models Winch Accessories llle 480 Only Except Power Wagon 504 Operating Your Winch sso so e en 4822 W ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 505 Rigging Iechr ques 023 40084 848 4 va ward 494 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 505 ll POWER STEERING 1500 Models 496 Traction Control System TCS If Equipped 506 ll POWER STEERING 2500 3500 Models 498 Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 506 Power Steering Fluid Check 2500 3500 Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped 507 Models 12 5 ss rede ERE eer we eed 499 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped ll FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L 6 4L Power Wagon Only ss sac ree mau 511 ENGINES ONLY IF EQUIPPED 26 04424904 500 Electronic Stability Control ESC It Bquipped ere HER eia 514 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363
193. ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink amp button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink amp To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e g
194. OP START READY state A STOP START READY message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC within the Stop Start section Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 2 The vehicle must be completely stopped 3 The transmission Gear Selector must be in Drive and the brake pedal depressed The engine will shut down the tachometer will move to the zero position and the stop start telltale will illumi nate indicating you are in an Autostop While in an Autostop the Climate Controls system may automati cally adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not AUTO STOP Prior to engine shut down the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled In following situations the engine will not stop e Driver s seat belt is not buckled e Driver s door is not closed e Outside temperature is less than 1 F 17 C or greater than 104 F 40 C Battery temperature too warm or cold The vehicle is on a steep grade 372 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss e Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept able cabin temperature has not been achieved e HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed e Engine has not reached normal operating temperature Bat
195. OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES B CLIMATE CONTROLS 45 40 ehe tra Manual Climate Controls Without Touch Screen If Equipped Manual Climate Controls With Touch Screen If Equipped 344 General Overview 00 00000 349 Summer Operation ies sree etss 0000 eee 356 Winter Operation sssr eese 356 Vacation Storage sss enesis ee eee ee 357 Window Fogging and Frosting 357 Outside Air Intake lisse 357 Operating Tips Chart 0 358 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 1 Headlight Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Radio 4 Hazard Switch 5 Upper Glove Compartment 6 Lower Glove Compartment 7 115v Power Inverter Outlet 8 Power Outlet 9 Lower Switch Bank 10 Instrument Panel Drawer 11 Climate Controls 12 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 040170078 13 Gear Selector Transfer Case Position Switch 14 Ignition Switch 15 Hood Release 16 Parking Brake Release 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 040370063 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 2 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light 1 Tachometer This light monitors the Anti lock Brake System The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions ABS Th
196. OUR VEHICLE 243 CAUTION Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped The switch for the power sliding rear window is located Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to 5 the overhead console the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 034237087 Rear Window Switch Push the switch to the right to open the glass Pull the switch to the left to close the glass 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Unfolding the Load Floor A locking device in the center of the window helps to 1 Lift the 60 40 seat Maso to the upward position prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the lock to release the window FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60 40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor WARNING Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the load floor While driving or in an accident you may experience abrupt stopping rapid acceleration or sharp turns Loose objects
197. OUR VEHICLE 81 3 e e e Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9 1 1 operator is made the 9 1 1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9 1 1 operator indication that the occupant placed a 9 1 1 Call the vehicle brand and the last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle You should be able to speak with the 9 1 1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed NOTE Once a connection is made between the vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system and the 9 1 1 operator the 9 1 1 opera tor may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed Once the 9 1 1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle The vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9 1 1 operator until the 9 1 1 operator terminates the connec tion 5 The 9 1 1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with impor tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING WARNING Continued If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger e g Modifications to any part of the 9 1 1 Call system fire or smoke is visible dangerous road conditions or location do not wait for voice
198. OUR VEHICLE M turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch is rotated to the far right detent position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way left to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out Thi
199. OUTLETS The auxiliary 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets can provide power for in cab accessories designed for use with the standard cigar lighter plug The 12 Volt power outlets have a cap attached to the outlet indicating 12V DC together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery and can provide power at all times NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPARG knob and element must be used CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations Lower left and lower right of the center stack when equipped with a bench seat Power Outlet Center Console Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment if equipped Power Outlets Center Stack Center console when equipped with bucket seats 228 UNDERSTANDING THE
200. PED 370 B ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED Automatic Mode 0 0000000008 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not AUTOSTOP 51 argen per ex To Start The Engine While In Autostop o PEUT To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start SySt s ia Re bue bb Per bu POE RE d S To Manually Turn On The Stop Start SySleIT sa kae em edu dade te dns System Malfunction 00 375 360 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 376 Key Ignition Park Interlock 378 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 379 Eight Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped eser y ReHREEERA 379 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 1500 Models Only 1 5 1 02a rar tens 389 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 2500 3500 Models Only 425i 401 ll FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED 55 bere a oo ena Raps 412 Manually Shifted Transfer Case lf Equipped suae ice ikueg be Danae de 412 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch If Equipped 416 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped 423 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped 428 E AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM 1500 MODELS ONLY IFEQUIPPED 43
201. Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC 1P seconda before trying again displays OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C sed INI To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury If Engine Fails To Start Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it If the engine fails to start after you have followed the started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it could enter the catalytic converter and once the there while cranking the engine This should clear any engine has started ignite and damage the converter excess fuel in case the engine is flooded and vehicle Continued 370 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refe
202. R INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the Displays cluster and consists of eight sections 1 Main Screen The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under normal conditions yellow for non critical warnings red for critical warnings and white for on demand information 2 Audio Phone Information and Sub menu Informa tion Whenever there are sub menus available the position within the sub menus is shown here 3 Selectable Information Compass Temp Range to Empty Trip A Trip B Average MPG Trailer Trip 040973802 distance only Trailer Brake Gain 4 Telltales Indicators 5 Shift Lever Status PRNDL es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 6 Selectable Menu Icons 7 Air Suspension Status If Equipped 8 4WD Status 9 Selectable Gauge 2 10 Selectable Gauge 1 The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the
203. R sores 697 Automatic Transmission s 698 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion e e e ed ds 702 E FUSES POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER E VEHICLE STORAGE E REPLACEMENT BULBS ll BULB REPLACEMENT Base Quad Premium Bi Halogen Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Front Park And Turn If Equipped Fog Lamps If Equipped Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL With Cargo Lamp ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667 Cab Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped 730 729 M FLUID CAPACITIES 732 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS e035 ehe4eds cca de intri nwa 734 Engine ia cedo ma dev eee Be ed we 734 GhasslS exer ee ees aga ve EXTR ER oe 736 668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 1 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Battery 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Power Distribution Center Fuses 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 071405704 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 6 Speed Trans Only 8 Power
204. RE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF 9 1 1 Call Operating Instructions If Equipped 1 Press the 9 1 1 Call button 5b on the Rearview Mirror NOTE In case the 9 1 1 Call button is pushed in error there will be a 10 second delay before the 9 1 1 Call system initiates a call to a 9 1 1 operator To cancel the 9 1 1 Call connection press the 9 1 1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Phone Screen Termination of the 9 1 1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off 2 The LED light located between the Assist and 9 1 1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9 1 1 operator has been made ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING Y
205. RTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 Mega Cab Standard Cab What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg The Tether Anchor can be used with the seat belt until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt without the Tether Anchor once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al lowed if the child restraint manu facturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed No Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor 112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it th
206. Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD AUTO Four Wheel Drive Auto Range This range sends power to the rear wheels The four wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Additional traction for varying road conditions 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation Shifting Procedure NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected posi tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirem
207. S 633 060573853 060573852 5 Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 634 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations 4 Place the shift lever into PARK On four wheel drive 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or ee ee eee ee slippery areas 5 Turn the ignition OFF Block both the front and rear of the Bee wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if the right front Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the wheel is being changed block the left vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when rear wheel operating the jack or changing the wheel 060505162 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle 3 Set the parking brake when the vehicle is being jacked ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 635 Jack Instructions 2500 3500 Series WARNING Continued WARNING Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diag
208. Security System Manual Override 22 Key In Ignition Reminder 0 18 B ILLUMINATED ENTRY 22 B SENTRY KEY eesotsa arsi mei PENERE 18 Mi REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE 23 Replacement Keys 0000 19 Remote Unlock The Doors 25 H Customer Key Programming 20 BO To Lock The Doors 0 0 0 0004 27 General Information 00 20 Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 27 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Using The Panic Alarm 22 xci 3o Ra 28 W KEYLESS ENTER NEGO M i cuui ace ae Ce 42 RKE Air Suspension Remote Lowering Of WINDOWS 2545 956 sirens ead Rer py sasi 47 TO VENCC Te a wune tere A Power Windows If Equipped 47 Programming Additional Transmitters 29 Wind Bufeting 51 Transmitter Battery Replacement 30 E OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS 2022 51 General Information llle 33 Lap Shoulder Belts 55 m nin e LN NINE 34 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 63 How To Use Remote Start 0 200 000 a E DOOR LOCKS sss 38 Center Lap Belts oeste ded ne ested 64 TIENE RP S RE 38 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 65 Power Door Locks If Equipped 39 er eal ean P ids 7 pe Child Protection
209. Settings To Default Settings e Cancel e Okay Uconnect SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and Back hard keys located below the system 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Press the Screen Off hard key to turn off the Uconnect screen Press the Screen Off hard key a second time to turn the screen on Press the Back hard key to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect display Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 8 4 Settings Press the Apps soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto
210. TENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION ctestetetecsedeatesesen tp etastinta drea SUIS Eta Rida Edd 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE isle 9 Il UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE sseee e 129 3o UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ien 271 A STARTING AND OPERATING aua Dowda theories Dau v pa eed a odd 359 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 ctr s eder Ec REDE EY TTE FER RUE VERUS RR 605 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE uu 9p 534p 3 CEA DA R ERR Y TRE MW SIUE SU b RES 665 MAINTENANCE BCHEDUDES 4 6uid tud ope S PR ERE S VOCE e UE emen d o nes 739 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 56 ebrei ERRARE REX RE RER CREER E 749 9 INDEX H 761 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION secet hb brt b EROR RR 4 WI VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS 6 E HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 Wi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 B VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 4 INTRODUCTION Sas INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operati
211. TING AND OPERATING 523 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 524 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
212. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert amp warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat
213. To avoid serious injury or death Do not insert any objects into the receptacles For vehicles equipped with bucket seats there are two cupholders located in the floor console e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats The cupholders are located on the backside of the center portion of the front seat 20 Fold down the center section of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders Cupholders es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 Rear Cupholder Quad Cab Rear Cupholder Crew Cab Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders cupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear passen located in the center armrest ger convenience T 035105803 Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder Rear Cup Wells Crew Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup holder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 035105805 Rear Cup Wells STORAGE Glove Box Storage The glove box is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower storage area 035205586 Glove Box 1 Upper Glove Box 2 Lower Glove Box To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle release
214. UTION Be certain the anchor will withstand the load re quired to tension the wire rope 3 Apply at least 500 lbs 227 kg of tension to the rope while winding the rope Always use care to ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is neatly wound onto the drum ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 CAUTION Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the winch Low Voltage Interrupt Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage drops to a low level The winch will not power in or out for 30 seconds if this device is tripped If the interrupt is tripped the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to recover before continuing to winch Winch Motor Thermal Protection Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device in the motor If the winch is operated for an excessive duration the device may interrupt motor function to protect the winch motor During this time the winch will power out but will not power in Allow the winch motor to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch The winch will resume normal function once the motor cools 478 STARTING AND OPERATING Understanding The Features Of Your Winch 054000966 Winch Components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 479 1 Motor The winch motor is powered by the veh
215. UTRAL WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 657 Center Console Shifter If Equipped 1 Turn the engine off 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the shift lever override access cover located to the right of the shift lever 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole and push and hold the override release lever down 658 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION WARNING Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or Shift Lever Override Access Cover death for those in or around the vehicle 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 3 051205828 In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL transmission will not shift out of PARK such as a dead battery a M Park Rel i ilable 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover Beery ca Manual Bark Release 1S ON dle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 659 2 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the Manual Park Release access cover whi
216. Vehicle Limited Warranty Parts in this section for fluid specifications ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 699 CAUTION e If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your au Fluid Level Check Eight Speed Transmission The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis sion damage thorized dealer immediately Severe transmission damage may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid Level Check Six Speed Transmission It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is at normal operating temperature 170 180 F 77 82 C This normally occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid can not be held comfortably between the fingertips You can 7 read the transmission sump temperature in the EVIC display refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information 700 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Use the following procedure to check the
217. Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels can not be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole Secure the flat tire in the bed of the truck Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 060573853 2 Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly across the wheel opening E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 623 060573852 060573851 mm 3 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube 4 Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the Insert the tube through the access hole between the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the mechanism slip or click three or four times It cannot winch mechanism tube be overtightened Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place 624 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 1500 Series 1 Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug 2 Position the jack and tool bag Make sure the lug wrench is under the ja
218. aces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 696 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level position For 1500 Model axles the fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill hole within 1 4 in 6 4 mm of edge of hole for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear axle For all 2500 3500 Model axles the fluid level should be 1 4 in 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole on the 9 25 in front and 3 4 in x 1 4 in 19 mm 6 4 mm on 10 5 in rear axles The 11 5 in rear axle level should be 1 4 in 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole Drain And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle f
219. activate TOW HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode transmission upshifts are delayed and the trans mission will automatically downshift for engine brak ing when the throttle is closed and or during steady braking maneuvers 400 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation Normal operation is always the default at engine start up If TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started WARNING Do not use the TOW HAUL feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions The increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control which may cause an accident possi bly resulting in personal injury or death Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automat
220. ad This telltale will turn on to indicate that the maximum payload may have been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved at its current ride height e Service Stop Start System Telltale If Equipped i This telltale will turn on to indicate that the A Stop Start is Unavailable service Stop Start system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Dd This telltale will turn on to indicate that the fuel filler cap may be loose CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC White Telltales e Electronic Speed Control Ready This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Hill Descent Control Indicator Light If Equipped 4C The symbol indicates the status of the Hill Decent Control HDC feature The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km
221. adiator for an accu mulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the con denser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045671421 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Mode 422 Airis directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side win dow demist outlets 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Mix Mode We Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This s
222. ading Refer to A Word About Your Keys in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information When in ENTRY EXIT setting be aware of your surroundings you may not have the clearance re quired for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur The system requires that the ignition be in ON RUN position or the engine running for all user requested changes When lowering the vehicle all of the doors must be closed If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door s is closed This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into on coming traffic When raising the vehicle the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front When lowering the vehicle the front will move down first and then the rear After the engine is turned off it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly this is normal The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling 440 STARTING AND OPERATING Se to be disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension features must b
223. ae tae QUE E iR PIRA UA 147 Sliding Rear Window 0050 243 SLEINE sca ces deed ps genie eae ae de 496 DUPIIOOEP 2 marine YR eee ma e teal Rs 222 Windows leen 47 Power Steering Fluid 200 736 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 68 Pretensioners Seat Bells iss de ur ERREUR 67 Programmable Electronic Features 304 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 23 Radial Ply Tires Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap Radio Op ratioti dae em xe RR een 338 Rain Sensitive Wiper System sess 182 Ramp Trayel Index lt rece veh PR 53204 452 Rear Axle Differential 00 696 Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails 260 Rear Park Sense System llli ss 191 Rear Seat Folding te esce nibs eid RE RE tes 157 Rear Window Features 00 00000 242 Rear Window Sliding 00000005 244 Reclining Rear Seats a ceneri ana eee 156 Recorder Event Data 0 0 0000000 88 Recreational Towing eee 596 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 599 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 602 Reformulated Gasoline 00 561 Retrigerant c ches esa Ls PRES a Lee aon 682 Reminder Seat Belt 00 cee eae 67 Remote Control Starting System 774 INDEX ME Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 23 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 335 R
224. ag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the up
225. aight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If everything looks good and you feel confident then change transmission into a lower gear shift the transfer case into 4L Low and proceed with caution You should use first gear and 4L Low Range for very steep hills Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropri ate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest pos sible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a turn quickly back and forth This will provide a 460 STARTING AND OPERATING Se fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Neve
226. al permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo 568 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel
227. and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing or in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the pressure value will be updated and stop flashing or return to it s original color as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 558 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Tire Pressure Information System TPIS 3500 Series Trucks Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure Information System TPIS The Tire Pressure Information System TPIS uses wire less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sen sors to transmit tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPIS consists
228. and tools as previously described WARNING T 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 641 To Stow The Flat Or Spare NOTE Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 1 Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve nience in checking the spare tire inflation Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel 060573853 2 Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly across the wheel opening 642 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 060573852 060573851 3 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube 4 Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube wheel is drawn into place against
229. anied by a Low Tire message in the odometer Base Cluster or in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC screen in dicating Low Tire for EVIC enabled clusters 17 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped ZO This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 18 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 19 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE The highest available transmission gear is dis played in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 20 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Menu The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 21 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the
230. ansmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 RKE Air Suspension Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle If Equipped For easy entry and loading your vehicle can be lowered by pressing the Key Fob air suspen sion lowering button two times When Remote key FOB lowering is requested the vehicle will send a series of chirps and flashes to alert the customer that the operation has begun and will continue these alerts until it successfully lowers The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to lower remotely The vehicle must not already be in Entry Exit Park ride height The vehicle battery must be fully charged All doors must be closed The ignition key must be o
231. ansverse the incline at an angle WARNING heading slightly up or down If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE Never back down a hill in NEU TRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water locking or skidding the tires Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and Driving Through Water 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be a
232. ap loop Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position 2 Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the right or left outboard seat Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121 4 Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop see Installing Three Child Restraints diagram Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions 1 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat Route the tether straps following the directions for B right and left seating positions above 2 Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop but do not tighten the straps yet 3 Place a child restraint on the center rear seat Route the tether strap following the directions for the center seating position above 4 Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop 5 Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions tightening the right and left tether straps before the center tether strap 022670235 Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop 122 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased hea
233. arage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
234. at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded ee STARTING AND OPERATING 569 The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do Continued CAUTION Continued parts on your vehicle can break or it can change t
235. ation 24 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealer for service UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Teel ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph N 040971462 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
236. ation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control knob when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled auto matically if these modes are selected UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 General Overview Soft Keys Hard Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect system screen The hard keys located below the Uconnect screen oF Q o gt SOC OO Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft keys 0456005994 Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 MAX AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when MAX A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the MAX A C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 2 AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 3 Recirculati
237. ations at 100 miles 160 km and after 500 miles 800 km It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times Torque wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval HOISTING A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca tions However a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts of the underbody 650 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION Never use a floor jack directly under the differential housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
238. be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 2H Or 4H To 4L With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transmission into NEUTRAL While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE e Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift the transmission into NEUTRAL hold foot on brake and turn the engine OFF Make shift to the desired mode 416 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the transmission is in gear Transfer Case Position Indicator Light The Transfer Case Position Indicato
239. belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant
240. bin is located behind the front seats and runs front seats are pockets that can be used for storage the length of the cab UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 035205817 Storage Bin Crew Cab Storage Storage and Seats Crew Cab CAUTION The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seats Lift the seats to access the storage com Always lift the storage compartment lids by using partment the handle Failure to lift the lids by using the handle can result in damage to the lids To open the storage compartments lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab behind the rear seat REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
241. ble Care should always be exercised when operating a from your authorized dealer vehicle with unrestrained cargo Vehicle speeds n may need to be reduced Severe turns or rough You can carry wide building materials sheets of ply roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo wood etc by building a raised load floor Place lumber that may result in vehicle damage If wide building across the box in the indentations provided above the materials are to be frequently carried the installa wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the tion of a support is recommended This will re floor strain the cargo and transfer the load to the pickup box floor WARNING The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur If you wish to carry more than 600 Ibs 272 kg of material suspended above the wheelhouse sup ports must be installed to transfer the weight of the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result The use of proper supports will permit Continued loading up to the rated payload e Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an accident causing serious or fatal injury poses only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel housings Place wooden boards across the box from side to side to create separate
242. ble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for er four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the V ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your autho rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 127 Floor Mat Safety Information WARNING Continued Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your Never place or install floor mats or other floor vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they secured to prevent them from moving and interfer cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals ing with the pedals or the ability to control the or impair safe operation of your vehicle in o
243. ble to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want to use first gear in 4L Low Range and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion CAUTION Water ingestion into the axles transmission transfer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy e Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If necessary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is t
244. blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condition investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 4 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE e Acontinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator remains on and does not flash or flashes at a rapid rat
245. ccur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result 124 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its WARNING Continued first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This n should be considered a normal part of the break in and It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area not interpreted as an indication of difficulty inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously SAFETY TIPS injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO belts AREA e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and Transporting Passengers using a seat belt properly WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 125 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do
246. cessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 506 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Traction Control System TCS If Equipped The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non slipping wheels to provide optimal forward trac tion Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes The
247. ch is just above the parking brake release handle below and to the left of the steering column 3 Using the screwdriver or similar tool push the Manual Park Release lever locking tab just below the middle of the lever to the right 4 While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward until it locks in place pointing towards the driver s seat Release the locking tab and verify that Manual Park Release Pull Strap the Manual Park Release lever is locked in the released Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release position 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 5 The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle 660 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE To Reset The Manual Park Release 1 Push the locking tab to the right to unlock the lever 2 Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its original position until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever 3 Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position 4 Re install the access cover TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating
248. charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the WARNING negative post of the booster battery Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of plosion the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 653 WARNING 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster spected at your authorized dealer battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged CAUTION battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
249. ck and tools from the bracket assembly counterclockwise remove the wing bolt and then slide Turn the jack turn screw counterclockwise to release jack the assembly out from under the seat from bracket assembly 630 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued you may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force resulting in serious injury Removing The Spare Tire 1 Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle Insert the tube through the access hole be Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly tween the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper WARNING and into the winch mechanism tube 060574343 After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 631 060573849 2 Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle 632 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 060573850 060573851 3 Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain 4 Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to access to the spare tire retainer tilt the retainer at the end of the cable en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIE
250. ck near the jack turn screw 060573850 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 060573848 Jack And Tool Bag WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 625 3 Secure the tool bag straps to the jack 060601443 Jack Hold Down Fastener Jack And Tools Tied NOTE Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold 4 Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding down location the jack by the jack turn screw slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor 5 Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan Reinstall the plastic cover 626 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued you may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force resulting in serious injury Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground CAUTION Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap Jack And Tools 1500 Series WARNING Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap damage to the hub cap finish may occur After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving You must use the flat end of the lug wre
251. ck when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized b ry 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 10 Oil Pressure Gauge If Equipped TH The pointer should always indicate some oil pres sure when the engine is running A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indi cate a lubrication system malfunction Immediate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer 11 Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph km h 12 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped 5 This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 13 Cargo Light If Equipped The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo Cs light is activated by pressing the cargo light button on the headlight switch 14 Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 15 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 16 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
252. cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARQ Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition 706 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result
253. comes the anchor point In this case be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your vehicle from moving Ideally you ll want an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the vehicle will move This allows the wire rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum An anchor point as far away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest pulling power 7 Attach the Clevis D shackle and Tree Trunk Protector Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain and through the hook loop being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn STARTING AND OPERATING 487 054000976 Clevis D Shackles 8 Lock the clutch Lock the winch drum by rotating the clutch lever on the winch to engage NOTE Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged 488 STARTING AND OPERATING 9 Connect the remote control to the winch control box 10 Put wire rope under tension Using the remote con located behind the front bumper Be careful not to let trol switch slowly wind the wire rope until no slack the remote control cord dangle in front of the winch If remains Once the wire rope is under tension stand you choose to control the winch from inside your well clear of it and never step over it vehicle always pass the remote through a window to avoid pinching the cord in the door Always discon nect the remote control when
254. con ditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan gerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 516 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ESC Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than TCS would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 517 WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip featu
255. condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen An example of this message type is Automatic High Beams On Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change in
256. contact from a 9 1 1 operator All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location The 9 1 1 Call system is embedded into the vehi cle s electrical system Do not add aftermarket Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9 1 1 electrical equipment to the vehicle s electrical sys Call system capabilities tem This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call To avoid inter ference that can cause the 9 1 1 Call system to fail never add aftermarket equipment e g two way If the 9 1 1 Call system detects a malfunction any of the mobile radio CB radio data recorder etc to your following may occur at the time the malfunction is vehicle s electrical system or modify the antennas detected and at the beginning of each ignition cycle on your vehicle The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9 1 1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you 9 1 1 Call System Limitations 9 1 1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9 1 1 system calls Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 The Phone Screen will display the following message Even if the 9 1 1 Call system is fully functional factors Vehicle phone requires service Please contact your beyon
257. core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 1500 SERIES TRUCKS WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack C
258. ctor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder
259. cturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE t may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time The EVIC will display CHAN NEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programmi
260. current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information A oOo N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button Release both buttons at the same time Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned o
261. d The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automat ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced the mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx To Activate To Deactivate 1 Select Automatic High Beams ON through the Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center SmartBeam system EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Un 1 derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation 2 Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO A posit
262. d Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 541 WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 k
263. d in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Seat Adjuster While sitting in the seat pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or backward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Dump Feature Manual Recline Seat Only Standard Cab Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to swing dump forward on manual recliner seats This dump feature allows access to the storage bin behind the seat WARNING e Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actuating the handle The seatback may swing forward and hit you causing injury To avoid injury place your hand on the seatback and actuate the
264. d no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the multifunction lever Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early WARNING or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm 031605589 Tilt Steering Lever Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause Continued The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls There are also soft keys in the radio screen that will acti
265. d Chrysler Group LLC s control may prevent or dealer and stop the 9 1 1 Call system operation These include but p limi the following factors e An In Vehicle Audio message will state Vehicle phone are not mied ta the followme r a requires service Please contact your dealer e The ignition key has been removed from the ignition and the delayed accessories mode is active WARNING Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9 1 1 Call services If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated have an authorized The 9 1 1 Call system software and or hardware are dealer service the 9 1 1 Call system immediately damaged during a crash The ignition key is in OFF position e The vehicle s electrical systems are not intact The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated have an authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately are unavailable or obstructed The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon nected during a vehicle crash Wireless and or Global Positioning Satellite signals 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e Equipment malfunction at the 9 1 1 operator facility Operator error by the 9 1 1 operator e Wireless network congestion e Weather and Buildings structures geographic terrain or tunnels NOTE Never place anyth
266. d a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 STARTING AND OPERATING 579 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading In formation Placard in Starting and Operating for fur ther information 580 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Towing Requirements WARNING To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the t
267. d also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result 5 pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could The following indicator should be used to ensure that you result have engaged the transmission into the PARK position position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must start the engine and also press the brake With brake pedal released look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position 384 STARTING AND OPERATING Se REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle
268. d motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Left Outboard And Center Seating Position Shown es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 123 Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will o
269. d rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear seat 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EE Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against
270. d the system will produce a tone As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1 2 second tone to slow to fast to continuous 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mM The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79 79 45 in 45 31 in 31 18 in Less than 18 in in cm in 200 cm 200 115 cm 115 80 cm 80 45 cm 45 cm Front Distance Greater than 47 47 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm in 120 cm 120 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow for rear Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone only for rear only Arcs None Ath Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert chime after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle has been detected the vehicle is stationary and brake pedal is applied Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Front and Rear chim
271. de Mirrors It Equipped sin cv going Pug enr tee unge 141 Driver s Power Seat If Equipped 147 Power Mirrors If Equipped 142 Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped 150 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Lumbar If Equipped Heated Seats If Equipped Ventilated Seats If Equipped Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped Mega Cab Rear Seat Features Head Restraints ll DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Programming The Memory Feature Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Memory Position Recall ss 150 Mi TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 166 151 B HIS ssessesti bebo heRX X 3 REESE es 168 153 Headlights 5 eine dais ERE dace at aoe 169 154 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 169 156 Headlights On With Wipers Available 156 With Automatic Headlights Only 170 160 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped iu une RE Tere E ES acr 170 be Headlight Delay s or cser llle 170 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control It Equipped pie capri epe e s 171 Hed Parking Lights And Panel Lights 173 165 Fog Light
272. des Pease te ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 213 Opening Sunroof Express 224 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 214 Closing Sunroof Express 224 Programming A Rolling Code 215 Pinch Protect Feature sss cosca cs ristas 224 Programming A Non Rolling Code 217 Venting Sunroof Express 225 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 218 sunshade Op ration secre aces 225 Using HomeLink8 sess eese 220 Wind Bulleling dua ecco y 225 s ME 220 Sunroof Maintenance liess 225 Ignition Off Operation 0 0 225 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M E ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 226 ll CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED ga Lnerremvo nix 230 ll POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED 231 B CUPHOLDERS 5 e RR ERR 232 Front Seat Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats 232 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Mounted Shifter isse kae gars 232 Rear Cupholder Quad Cab 233 Rear Cupholder Crew Cab LL 233 B SIORAGE rx ERS ES 234 Glove Box Storage css snenia riie ia 234 Door Storage scere sans ene sanss 236 Center Storage Compartment It Equipped duree Eremi Ee nts 237 Second Row In Floor Storage Bin
273. different transfer case posi tion the indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on 426 STARTING AND OPERATING Se after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the v
274. draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the plugged in long enough without engine operation engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to battery degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 654 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accel erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the en gine NOTE For trucks equipped with 8 speed automatic transmission Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph 8 km h or less Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning
275. dule If Yellow Urea Heater Cum Equipped mins Diesel F69 15 Amp Mod SCR 12V F64 25 Amp Fuel Injectors Blue Cummins Diesel Natural Powertrain If Equipped F65 10 Amp USB interface F70 30 Amp Fuel Pump Motor Red Green F66 10 Amp Sunroof Passen F71 25 Amp Amplifier Red ger Window Natural Switches Rain F72 10 Amp Voltage Stabilizer Sensor Red Modules If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 717 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F74 20 Amp Brake Vacuum F76 10 Amp Antilock Brakes Yellow Pump Gas Diesel Red Electronic Stability Gas If Equipped Control Engine F77 10 Amp Drivetrain Control amp 1500 Red Module Front Axle LD Die Disconnect Module p 10 F78 10 Amp Engine Control SIE Red Module Electric Red C Power Steering um Mins F79 15 Amp Clearance Lights Diesel Blue Engine F80 10 Amp Universal Garage F75 10 Amp Coolant Tempera Red Door Opener y Red ture Valve Actuator Compass 718 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Red Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F81 20 Amp Trailer Tow Right F87 10 Amp Air Suspension If Yellow Turn Stop Lights Red Equipped Trailer F82 10 Amp Steering Column Tow Steering Col Red Control Module umn Control Mod Cruise Control ule F84 1
276. e 5 Voltmeter When the engine is running the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving the electrical sys tem should be serviced NOTE The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various engine temperatures This cycling operation is caused by the post heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module Post heat operation can run for several minutes and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize 6 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the Anti lock Brake System reservoir BRAKE 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until
277. e e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open 704 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e e e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soo
278. e done through the radio Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system To avoid per sonal injury or damage to the system see your authorized dealer for service Air Suspension Modes The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations Tire Jack Mode To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running Transport Mode To assist with flat bed towing the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running ee STARTING AND OPERATING 441 Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be enabled w
279. e RE dal ERN 4 230 Clean Air Gasoline llle 561 Cleaning Wheels iera peeru E een E rae ees 704 Climate Control llle 338 Cold Weather Operation ses cie acies esras ss 369 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 337 Compact Spare Tires issar e andika k e s 539 Console Overhead 0 0 00 cee eee 211 Contract Service errs errr esrin ee 753 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 690 Cooling System i reed RR et dre RR d 687 Adding Coolant Antifreeze sss 689 Coolant Capacity 6 eee eee 732 Coolant Levels iss ceu eee TRES 687 Disposal of Used Coolant 691 Drain Flush and Refill 0 688 Insp cuOn cies arree e p OR ek RE d 691 Points to Remember 000 0005 693 Pressure Cap i see e e 690 Radiator Cap si beaga galg eee 690 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 688 Corrosion Protection 0 0 00 702 Cupholders ehe Ree Reime 232 a INDEX 765 Customer Assistance llle eee 752 Data Recorder Event 0 0 000 eee eee ae 88 Daytime Running Lights lt e een emsa a mae ae 170 Dealer Service 0 0 0 0 eret eek h eee 673 Defroster Rear Window 000 00 eee 242 Defroster Windshield 000005 126 Delay Intermittent Wipers 0 180 Differential Limited Slip 0 470 Dipsticks Power Steering sunti pene nannaa eee 499 Disabled Vehicle Tow
280. e bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down 022506513 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside Storage Position the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the glow in the dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when not in use Bed Extender If Equipped To install the bed extender into the storage position 3 The bed extender has three functional positions perform the following e Storage Position 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to e Divider Position e nyderbosun release the extender side gates e Extender Position 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 036706565 Center Handle And Lock Storage Position 4 Center Handle Lock 3 Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard 2 Handle ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops 2 With the side gates open position the extender fully forward in the bed against the front panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 Cargo Tie Down Loop Side Gates Closed 4 Rotate the center handle
281. e black latch and black buckle Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Press the button located on the upper belt guide and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Cenier Lap Belts The center seating position for the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap b
282. e door 055001823 B Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 529 Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the Al DING INFORMATION 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG GR XXX LBS 3 tire size designed for your vehicle TIRE FRONT REAR SPARE 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and ORIGINAL TIR SIZE P195 70RT4 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 spare tires COLD TIRE TURION bia S j 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard 530 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section
283. e door s 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped 021970066 Power Window Switches The control on the left front door panel has UP DOWN switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows There is a single opening and closing switch on THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of the Quad Cab and Crew Cab models The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN or ACC position and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is opened NOTE The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR V
284. e hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Wy Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head light switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lights if equipped Headlight Switch Location Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less suscep tible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Headlights To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight Z switch clockwise to the headlight position
285. e ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 e Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engi
286. e is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115 Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage Regular and Mega Cab Trucks In the regular cab truck the top tether anchorages are located behind the center and right passenger seats In the mega cab truck the top tether anchorages are located behind each rear seating position There is a plastic cover over each an chorage To attach the tether strap of the child restraint 1 Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the seat Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint
287. e light will turn on when the ignition Per Minute RPM x 1000 switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds CAUTION If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer at high RPM for extended periods Engine operation over 3200 RPM Redline can result in significant damage that will not be covered under SE warranty If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 3 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL cy The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic OBDII system which moni tors the emissions and engine control system If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then
288. e lock cylinder ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683 Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not ra diator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reser voir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This ra
289. e negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Chrysler Group LLC 14D241 126 AA STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Cli First Edition Printed in U S A
290. e speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 0 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 0 km h NOTE Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km h depends on selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display settings menu or the RADIO settings menu dependent on vehicle configuration To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Contro
291. e system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result NOTE The TPMS telltale is also accomp
292. e to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 418 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD and 4LOW are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case position the indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry se
293. e using your winch before you get stuck Some key points to remember when using your winch are 1 Always take your time to assess the situation and plan your pull carefully 2 Always take your time when using a winch 3 Use the right equipment for the situation 4 Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope 5 Only the operator should handle the wire rope and remote control 6 Think safety at all times Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch CAUTION Always Know Your Winch Take the time to fully read and understand the included Installation and Operations Guide and Basic Guide to Winching Techniques in order to understand your winch and the winching operation Continued 484 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss CAUTION Continued 1 Inspect the winch winch mount and wire rope for damage Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or e Always inspect winch installation and wire rope rope shows excessive wear or damage condition before operating the winch Frayed kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced immediately Loose or damaged winch installation must be corrected immediately Always be sure any element which can interfere with safe winching operations is removed prior to initiating winching Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum wire rope and rigging e Inspect for cracks pinches frayed wires or loose connection
294. e volume settings can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect System if equipped If Uconnect System is equipped chime volume settings will not be accessible from the EVIC The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles Enabling And Disabling Front And Or Rear ParkSense Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Front ParkSense switch Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear ParkSense switch Pya OFF When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the Front or Rear system is disabled the EVIC will display the FRONT PARKSENSE OFF or REAR PARKSENSE OFF message for five seconds followed by a car graphic with 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M OFF in the corresponding side This car graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE NOTE Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system will interrupt the five second messages and the EVIC will display the car graphic with the corresponding arcs and OFF me
295. e when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617 3 Placement of the jack 4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the lower control arm JSS i lt lt Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4X2 Front Jacking Location Indicator 618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES When changing a front wheel place the scissor jack under 4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the lower control arm 4X2 Front Jacking Location 060573854 4X4 Front Jacking Location Indicator en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619
296. ear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected Operation Pushing the Trailer Mode button once while at Normal Ride Height NRH will lower the vehicle to trailer level ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 NOTE The LED will continuously blink until vehicle trailer level that been achieved Pushing the Trailer Mode again will raise the vehicle to Normal Ride Height NRH NOTE The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride Height NRH has been achieved Transport Mode No indicator lamps will be illumi nated Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle e Tire Jack Mode The LED will be illuminated Tire Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle Wheel Alignment Mode The LED will be illumi nated Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle e AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM POWER WAGON MODELS ONLY IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front and rear differentials These differentials when engaged mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming stuck The locking front and rear differentials should only be engaged during low speed extreme off road situa tions where one w
297. ear of the lamp can be gained through this access hole 6 Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws 8 Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front lamp unit housing 073306874 724 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 073306875 9 Remove the headlamp assembly Grasp the outboard edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet 10 Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket 11 Replace bulb s as necessary CAUTION e Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result e Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the bulb socket or the lamp wiring NOTE There are access covers over both headlamp bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing if equipped These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb has been replaced MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 725 Fog Lamps If Equipped Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 1 Reach under and behind the front bumper to access 1 Remove the two screws that pass through the bed the back of the front fog lamp housing sheetmetal 2 Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connec
298. eated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect System For more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es DOOR LOCKS Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle anual Door Locks without lifting the lock knob Doors locked before closing will remain locked when Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock ciased knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your vehicle WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e For personal security and safety in the event of an collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle 021870064 Continued Door Lock Knob ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the
299. ectronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Driver One Memory Position Recall To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 1 on the memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver one using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 Driver Two Memory Position Recall To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 2 on the memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver two using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 031305529 Hood Release Safety Latch Location 1500 Series Shown 2 Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it nos before raising the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam th
300. ectronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 lbs 750 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 583 CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher WARNING Continued Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued Integrated Trailer Brake Module If Equipped Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Mod ule ITBM for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic EOH trailer brakes NOTE This module has been designed and verified with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydrau lic systems Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM 584 STARTING AND OPERATING The us
301. ed STARTING AND OPERATING 547 The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed EE UE c EJ E 055703771 Tire Rotation 548 STARTING AND OPERATING Directional Tires If Equipped Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped For the R T package with 22 tires and wheels the The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be rotational direction of the tire must be taken into consid matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set eration when rotating the tires The recommended rota To check if tires are even lay a straight edge across all tion pattern for directional tires is shown below four tires The straight edge should touch all the tires EL E E C ELLE S 055710740 055740470 Tire Rotation Tire Rotation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 549 CAUTION 3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved direction of rotation This is to accommodate the asymmetrical design tread pattern of the On Off Road tire and the use of Outline White Letter OWL tires When replacing a flat the spare tire may have to be remounted on the rim or installed at a different location to maintain the correct placement of the tire on the wheel relative to the tire wheel position on the truck For example if the spare is used to replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re mounted on the rim
302. ed In this mode the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels Four wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Because the front axle is en gaged this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for spe cific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD 4LOW and 4WD AUTO are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a
303. ed Power Wagon Only HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes HDC has three states 1 Off feature is not enabled and will not activate 2 Enabled feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application 3 Active feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed Enabling HDC HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC e Driveline is in 2WD Low Range Vehicle speed is below 5mph Parking brake is released Driver door is closed Activating HDC Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude greater than approximately 8 The set speed for HDC is 512 STARTING AND OPERATING Se selectable by the driver and can be adjusted by using gear shifter The following summarizes the HDC set speeds Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1st 0 8 mph 1 3 km h 2nd 2 mph 3 2 km h 3rd 3 mph 4 8 km h 4th 4 mph 6 4 km h 5th 5 mph 8 km h 6th 6 mph 9 6 km h D 6 mph 9 6 km h R 1 mph 1 6 km h N 1 mph 3 2 km h P Not Applicable NOTE During HDC the gear shifter input is used for HDC target s
304. ed at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer o
305. ed in the instrument cluster On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 CAUTION WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when Continued using ParkSense 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued Before using ParkSenseG it is strongly recom mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for tow
306. ed to shift out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disen gage when the engine is running Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Start Keyless Enter N Go Key Fob is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL 2 Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 368 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever shift selector in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever shift selector is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph
307. ed to the ON RUN position The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a bette
308. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Shifting Procedure NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous posi tion will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the require ments for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original posi tion make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WD To 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off This shift cannot be com pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position NOTE The four wheel drive system will not allow shif
309. eed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system shuts off ESC is off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESC Off Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC is off To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation ESC Off is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOCK or NEUTRAL to WD LOW the ESC system will be in this mode WARNING In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduc tion and stability features are disabled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only ee STARTING AND OPERATING 519 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ES Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunctio
310. efore exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmis sion is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission shifter Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could oper ate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 WARNING Continued CAUTION Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or e DO NOT race the engine when shifting from in a location accessible to children and do not PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with can damage the drivetrain Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must start the engine an
311. ehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome OFF position rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far left detent position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock all doors tailgate and the RamBox if equipped as well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi mately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held radio trans
312. ehicle to roll which may cause personal injury or death NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning This could cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 WARNING Continued disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range
313. eir child re seat of the vehicle straint Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be use
314. elt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable WARNING e A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down and under the belt in a collision A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip bones In either case the risk of internal injuries is greater Wear a lap belt low and snug en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a switchable Automatic Locking Retractors ALR or with a Cinching Latchplate which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position For Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab Only Driver Center Passenger First Row N A Cinch ALR Second Row ALR Cinch ALR e N A Not Applicable ALR Automatic Locking Retractor For Standard Cab Only Driver Center Passenger First Row N A ALR ALR Second Row N A N A N A N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Reta
315. emain on solid To lock the rear axle place the vehicle in 4LO Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operat ing for further information Move the axle locker switch position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The RR indicator light will remain on when the rear axle is locked ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 NOTE Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to allow the axle to fully lock If the indicator light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or FRONT REAR LOCK position drive the ve hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action WARNING Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving A locked front axle is intended for off road driving only Locking the front axle during on road driving will reduce the steering ability This could cause a collision and you may be seriously injured To lock the front axle move the axle locker switch to FRONT REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The indicator light will be solid when the front axle is locked NOTE The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock To unlock the front axle move the axle locker switch to REAR LOCK The FRONT REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the axle is unlocked NOTE The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side loads on the axle Driving slowly while turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to
316. ements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 18 7 Quarts 17 7 Liters 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models w Heavy Duty We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile For mula that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 19 2 Quarts 18 2 Liters 6 4 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of Chrysler Ma terial Standard MS 12106 18 7 Quarts 17 7 Liters 734 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 5 7 We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma terial Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine For 2500 3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating greater than 14 000 1bs 6 350 kg We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma terial Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 735 Component Fluid Lubricant or
317. emory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available Easy Exit Seats When this feature is selected the Driver s seat will automatically move rearward
318. emote Starting System 6 6 eee 34 Replacement Bulbs 00 00000000 720 Replacement Keys 2 cubes s Eee E44 19 Replacement Parts psa ac oiner eon km ed 673 Replacement Tires llle 543 Reporting Safety Defects 0 0 755 Restraint Heads edes RI iwi 160 Restraints Child soa ELE 89 Restraints Occupants ss eso beati esaret r piigi 51 Rotation Tires 2 0 0 0 ce anida 547 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 126 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 128 Safety Defects Reporting llle 755 Safety Exhaust Gas esee 125 Safety Information Tire 0 0 521 Safety TIpS s ie odin ee te See a tee RR ea es 124 Schedule Maintenance lessen 740 Seat Belt Maintenance leen 707 Seat Belt Reminder llle 67 Seat Bells cue edem eed ek esce pde X s 51 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 63 And Pregnant Women mires iie setis 68 Child Restraint sas errean cerpin Eara 89 Extenders a rumia Stowe eo a a GE 69 Front Seat 2 0 ee 55 INSpectiON 2d 2nch g s sere me oe adhere ule oe 126 Pretensioners llle 67 Reminder au iatan aa aak ete doa GORE RU dE 279 Untwisting Procedure 00000 63 SealS ase ea Garba RY Pr dah eae hea banaue as 147 Adjustment eee 147 Folding FloOt 44 itane xke Re hen 244 MemoOEy e ue ge e ede e kae Ed acp e ios 162 en INDEX 775 POWER aa er So
319. ens Re men 22 THES recse ans hr ee ede P a d acp eios 528 es INDEX 771 Locks Automatic Door Child Protection Door Power Door Low Tire Pressure System Lubrication Body Methanol Maintenance Free Battery 0 00 Maintenance Procedures Maintenance Schedule Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine Manual Service Manual Transmission Fluid Level Check Lubricant Selection Memory Seat Mirrors 1439 waa vrac RR Gh os Ee RSEN ees 136 Electric Powered 2 2 llle 142 Heated a 5 do be end boas dog oR md 144 MOL lt o ond icine ahd als Rak ROADS TR as 162 Ouid x seit Ligne eee eh ee 139 REARVICW ird eser ana EU Ee dere BUR hee RSS 136 Trailer Towing io ERROR ROVER s 146 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 549 Mopar Parts s so pr n Sole eked 673 MIBE ETBE iekizc b ohn eae Riad 561 Multi Function Control Lever llus 178 Navigation System Uconnect gps 208 New Vehicle Break In Period 123 Occupant Restraints 63 uses RR ee ee ee 51 Occupant Restraints Sedan 00 73 772 INDEX eee Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 560 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 452 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 452 OiL Engin8s odo Seater a a Rp ados Carat ec d 675 Capacity awcsbeecesrex eae ete P Ed Ea e E wor 732 Change Interval 2 asc sd d
320. ents for the selected position have been met e If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 434 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK Press the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch to shift the transfer case Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momen tarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position 2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped Use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL ee STARTING
321. ep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion When plowing snow to avoid transmission and drive train damage the following precautions should be ob served e Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph 24 km h At higher speeds operate in 4H Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating e Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the transmission 596 STARTING AND OPERATING Se RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF Two Wheel Four Wheel Drive Models The Ground Drive Models Flat Tow NONE NOT AL See Instructions LOWED e Automatic transmission in PARK e Manual transmission in gear NOT in NEUTRAL e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT AL NOT ALLOWED LOWED Rear OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 597 NOTE Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be lowered to the Entry Exit lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer t
322. er vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately ry The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turn
323. er interface consists of the following Manual Brake Control Lever Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes If the manual brake control lever is activated while the brake is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes The trailer and the vehicle s brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied 1 GAIN Adjustment Button 2 GAIN Adjustment Button 3 Manual Brake Control Lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 585 Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on pressing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will not be displayed If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated Trailer Brake Module ITBM the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will flash GAIN Adjustment Buttons Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in 0 5 increments The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 no trailer braking GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake contro
324. er to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Auto Unlock Doors If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of PARK and all doors closed Auto Unlock Doors Programming If Equipped The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or dis abled as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings System Setup in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accor dance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors if equipped of your vehicle have the Child Protection Door Lock system THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 021870069 Child Protection Door Lock Location To use the system open each rear door use a flat blade screwdriver or emergency key and rotate the
325. er wheel off the ground This distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by 1 000 is the RTI This vehicle has an RTI of 655 which means you can articulate one front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three wheels remain in contact with the ground Water Fording Characteristics Water fording characteristic is the vehicle s ability to cross a body of still water where the powertrain and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion This vehicle has high water fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of water without stopping 24 inches deep at a maximum speed of 10 mph 16 km h and a pool of water 30 inches deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph 8 km h both with an entrance ramp angle of 1 3 degrees The door sill height is 25 inches Water may intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simultane ous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface
326. ere ee end 676 Dipstick 2 2 cines RE dood get ge gd 675 Disposal a cise meni Ure hae dne tais 678 Filt t ose Pulte RE e ae tae AE ee egi 678 Filter Disposal 00 0 0000 678 Identification Logo 6 6 ille 676 Recommendation 00000 e ee 676 Synthe tie ii ae he eae oe a ele eee ee a 678 VISCOSIEY inns 1a Rated aoe ee ses a ese d eS 677 Oil Filter Selection llle 678 Onboard Diagnostic System 0 671 Operating Pr cautions sessie llle sss 671 Operator Manual Owner s Manual Outside Rearview Mirrors llle 139 Overdrive os ans deed degli ener rr aie ets 399 Overdrive OFF Switch lees 399 Overhead Consol iss ee emn 211 Overheating Engine sva mei en Res 284 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 Paint Care cece ses e n ea 702 Panic Alafmi osse ie eR x tia 28 Parking Drake ass Pd ge ea EE Eee anges 500 Park Sense System Rear llle 191 Passing Light ii en 179 Pedals Adjustable llle 186 Personal Settings s sede eR Rn eta 304 Pelis cate s odi ex Ut Arad a despite ee 123 Pets Transporting 2 6 lees 123 Pickup BOX 2 sire een dae eas ae 246 Placard Tire and Loading Information 529 en INDEX 773 Power Distribution Center Fuses 709 Door Locks 2 2222 m e ke s 39 METRO e ke rie eh ERU MUN X UON Se 142 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 226 SOS dur e tee RD ed ar
327. es Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B MIRRORS Ele RAS Rr c aie ae OS 136 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 144 mmm Inside Day Night Mirror 136 Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 0 0 144 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 137 Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped 144 Camera Display If Equipped 139 Slide On Rod Features Of Sun Visor Outside Mirrors 00 000008 139 I Equipped sois dns site saree wines dna 145 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 140 Tanlar LOVAG Minione SHE EQUUDDOS siasa iy a SEATS nuin ERO ete NEA 147 O Power Folding Outsi
328. es to normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway conditions Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road air pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 465 CAUTION Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure drive at slower speeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Vehicle Recovery If you drive off road you may encounter a situation where you will need to recover your vehicle Vehicle recovery should always be given consideration before attempting a questionable obstacle You should never go off road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a situation Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most situations The first thing to do is assess the situation Why are you stuck Are you hung up on something Would it be easier to go forward or to go backward Can you still move the vehicle Is there an anchor point to winch to Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to help Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process Answering these questions will help you determine the best method of recovery If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick ground then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first choice If you have ample room an additional vehicle and there is low r
329. esigned to be used as a tool for WARNING changing tires only The jack should not be used to Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Jack Location Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The The jack and jack tools are stored under the front vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You passenger seat could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get Removal Of Jack And Tools 2500 3500 Series under a raised vehicle take it to a service center To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the where it can be raised on a lift plastic access cover located on the side of the front Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is passengers seat To remove the cover pull the front part on a jack of the cover closest to the front of the seat toward you to release a locking tab Once the front of the cover is Continued Joose slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 629 ee i een mm Jack Access Cover Jack And Tools 2500 3500 Series Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt Remove the ja
330. et is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be used to hold the ash receiver 1 Cigar Lighter 2 Ash Receiver ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watts Maximum outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel to the right of the radio This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset 034771466 Power Inverter Outlet To turn on the power outlet simply plug in the device The outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged NOTE Due to built in overload protection the power inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor WARNING Mounted Shifter
331. etting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode ov Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use the DEFROST mode with maximum blower and warm temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Press this button to choose between outside air Ce intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A LED will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE e If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle
332. f Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States Canada GQ4 61T 1470A 42T 560 STARTING AND OPERATING Se FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L 6 4L Engine These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular 800dfabs gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engines This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 800dfab an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitati
333. f Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information Tilt Mirror In Reverse When this feature is selected and the shift lever is placed in reverse gear the side mirrors tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Wipers If Equipped When ON is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated When the system is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Hill Start Assist HSA When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated
334. ff To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors the tailgate and the RamBox if equipped The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn
335. fob from the ignition switch 13 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 14 Release the parking brake NOTE With electronic shift transfer case e Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released 602 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Press and hold the brake pedal 4 Start the engine Shift the transmission into NEU TRAL Depress the clutch pedal on a manual trans mission e With manual shift transfer case shift the transfer case lever to the desired posi
336. fore exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmis sion is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued 378 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission shifter Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF key removal position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF position and the transmission is locked in PARK when ever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position NOTE If a malfunction
337. free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required 680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
338. ft down into second and first gears normally Use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades In ERS mode gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears and ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 and 6 Overdrive gears are the same as the normal fourth and fifth gears STARTING AND OPERATING 397 You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the ERS switch column shift or tapping the shift lever to the left console shift will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever switch one time in the direction the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap down will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added underdrive gear Once in ERS mode tapping ERS Column Shift Lever or will change the top available gear 051205603 398 STARTING AND OPERATING 051205622 Console Shift Lever To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to the right console shift or press the ERS
339. h which has an LED which offers feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated This is the normal operating condition for HDC e The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met e The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to excess speed e The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed Electronic Stability Control ESC If Equipped The ESC system enhances directional control and stabil ity of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
340. had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are 674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance attempting any procedure yourself services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides tho
341. he way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing 570 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combinati
342. he compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 10 6 7 8 Compass Variance Map 040506040 e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft ke
343. he directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Center Seat LATCH Quad Cab Mega CabG Crew Cab Split Bench If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position do not use that outboard position If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt do not install a child seat in that outboard position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages
344. he transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Four wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer case Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer case located in this section for further informa tion Manually Shifted Transfer Case If Equipped The transfer case provides four mode positions Two wheel drive high range 2H e Four wheel drive high range 4H e Neutral N e Four wheel drive low range 4L This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 When additional traction is required the 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and that the front and rear drive shafts are locked together This light will il
345. he water depth current and bottom con ditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method ee STARTING AND OPERATING 463 CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the
346. he wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart 758 significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresp
347. he wheel wrench The tube extension may be used but is not required 4x2 Front Jacking Location 060609051 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 637 4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location For 2500 and 3500 4x4 series trucks when changing the front wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the front Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench 638 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 4x4 Front Jacking Location 060609050 4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Location For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks when changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear 060609073 Rear Jacking Location All en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 639 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench CAUTION Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required NOTE If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the
348. heel is likely to not be in contact with the ground It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and speed limitations 448 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION e Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced roads The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles are locked on hard surfaced roads Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning You can damage drivetrain components Lock the rear axle before attempting situations or navigating terrain which could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch The switch has three positions AXLE UNLOCK REAR LOCK and FRONT REAR LOCK Under normal driv ing conditions the switch should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position In the AXLE UNLOCK position the front and rear axles are unlocked In the REAR LOCK position the rear axle is locked In the FRONT REAR LOCK position the front and rear axles are locked NOTE Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position the limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque biasing capability for moderate low traction environments During the command to lock the axle the indicator light will flash until the axle is locked After the lock command has been successfully executed the light will r
349. heel skins Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion loosen the wheel skin Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet When replacing the hub caps tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the wheel en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 647 nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the achieved Recommended torques are shown in the fol bolt circle tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel lowing chart nut just previously tightened until final torque is Type Stud Hex Size Torque Torque Nut Size Ft Lbs Newton Meters Cone M14 x 1 5 22mm 120 140 160 190 Flanged M14 x 1 5 22mm 130 160 175 215 8 Stud Dual Rear Wheels Dual wheels are flat mounted and center piloted The lug nuts are a two piece assembly When the tires are being
350. hen you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Can two child restraints be at tached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor ages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be re moved THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion p 022632837 Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Ancho
351. hift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gears normally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the ERS switch will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping ERS or will change the top available gear 051205603 Column Shift Lever STARTING AND OPERATING 409 To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the ERS switch until D is once again displayed in the instru ment cluster WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the ERS switch down The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down 410 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION When using ERS for engine braking while descend ing steep grades be careful not to overspeed the engine Apply the brakes as needed to prevent en gine overspeed Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth and sixth gears The trans
352. ht when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109 Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle 022670220 Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab 022670224 Standard Cab 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Quad Cab Crew Cab What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al lowed if the child restraint manu facturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA
353. hysical condition must exercise care heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for when using the seat heater It may cause burns HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF even at low temperatures especially if used for Press dhe switch once o select HICH level heating Press the switch a sec ond time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF This is the same procedure for the soft keys in the radio long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause 030905580 serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from LOW to OFF automatically based on time and tempera ture of the seat The heated seats can operate on HIGH heat for a maximum of 60 minutes before switching to LOW heat at that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat setting it may operate for a maximum of 45 minutes before automatically shutting OFF The heated seats can shut OFF early or may
354. i i i i i i HEATED i I q EI Ju IS de 18 t jor S gt TEM ique B ub i i g i i i 3 i JE i Li H g i E 3 3 H i i p ied O Po T ein E op Ed i i l E 3 i E 8 i 3 eLecraome CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION See WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion camper manufacturers body builders Refer to the Warranty Information book Section 2 1 C Such equipment includes video monitors VCRs heaters stoves refrigerators etc For warranty coverage and service on these items contact the applicable manufac turer Operating instructions for the special equipment in stalled by the conversion camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle If these instructions are missing please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to
355. ically disengages ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage and the transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 2 to 5 km of driving Because top gear is disabled and the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not en gaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold This is normal Using the Elec tronic Range Select ERS shift control when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine Six Speed Automatic Transmission 2500 3500 Models Only The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive
356. icle charging system and features a thermal protection switch that automatically stops motor function in the power in direction if the motor gets too hot Remote Socket The remote socket allows the remote control to be attached to the control pack to allow the winch to function Winch Drum With Integral Brake The winch drum allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and transmits force to the wire rope The winch is equipped with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped 9 Stage Planetary Gear Set Provides balance between speed and pulling power Wire Rope The wire rope allows the winch to be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force 6 Clutch Lever The clutch lever allows the winch drum to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand Remote Control The remote control provides the interface between the winch operator and the winch The remote control provides the ability to power the winch in out and stop the winch To operate the winch the toggle switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to power the winch out The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral center position CAUTION If not installed the hook strap must be placed on the hook Fairlead The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and minimizes damage to the rope 480 STARTING AND OPERATIN
357. ift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 WARNING Continued Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exi
358. illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury or death NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning This could cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h 432 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High
359. in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued 502 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM If power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability the remaining system will still func tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel dur
360. ine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper ant is different and should not be mixed with maintenance intervals Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en Selection Of Coolant gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat uhi xs ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 689 CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 0
361. ing llle 660 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant issus 691 Door LOCKS 4 0244 kde deed a EE 38 Door Locks Automatic seen 40 Driving Off Pavement eiere reeda a mae e ae i aed 452 OfRROad i44 r aak Rea EES nd 452 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Mate orsi e RR UR EIER atin ea E mach aod p anid 472 Dual Rear Wheels 00 00000000 ee 548 Electrical Power Outlets 000 226 Electric Rear Window Defrost 242 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 416 Electronic Brake Control System 505 Anti Lock Brake System 00 0 505 Brake Assist System 0 0 000000000 506 Traction Control System a a aaua 00 0200 506 Electronic Range Select ERS 0 387 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 187 Electronic Stability Control ESC 514 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 208 Emergency Brake sereus llle 500 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 654 Hazard Warning Flasher 766 INDEX ae Jump Starting seie ee oem eed a ed 650 Tow Hooks llle 655 Emission Control System Maintenance 672 BASING ss cc ios ve a ana C ed RR Ce C di 669 Air Cleaner cicuesekereueewg ue de edem eae xod 679 Block Heater leen 375 Break In Recommendations 123 Compartment lt cess iss a eee ee ea is 668
362. ing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed in the rearview mirror display if equipped or Uconnect screen if equipped along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located to the left of the tailgate handle When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned ON The rear camera image will be dis played for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of RE VERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph 13 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position
363. ing for further information NOTE The vehicle must remain in the engine running ram position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension system SNOWPLOW 1500 Models Only NOTE Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow applications 592 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a colli sion resulting in serious injury or death CAUTION Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can cause damage to the vehicle WARNING Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in a collision Continued WARNING Continued Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de scribed earlier in this manual 2500 3500 Models Only Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option These packages include components necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow NOTE Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current Body Builders Guide See your authorized dealer installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information There are unique electrical systems that must be connected to properly a
364. ing applica tion greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light if equipped during brake use es STARTING AND OPERATING 503 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System WARNING The Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment It may be sus ceptible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals The Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS is de signed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation This is normal The ABS conducts a low speed selftest at about 10 mph 16 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop This is the
365. ing forward e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limi tations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE If ParkSense is enabled at one of these shift lever positions the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above A display warning will appear in the EVIC indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 18 in 45 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle The six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the l
366. ing leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 564 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can ADDING FUEL time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle The fuel filler cap gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Open the fuel door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counter clockwise Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 565 CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap
367. ing normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been progra
368. ing on or near the vehicle s wireless and GPS antennas You could prevent wireless and GPS signal reception which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9 1 1 Call system to function properly General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received includ ing interference that may cause undesired operation If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation or all of the following may occur continues see your doctor If these particles settle on lothing foll he garment manufacturer s in e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause ct a A iad as is ms structions for cleaning abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed If you are invo
369. ing the parking brake it will roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off Non EVIC Equipped Vehicles If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine OFF and the vehicle in PARK with the wheels straight 2 Start the engine 3 With the engine running and the brake applied rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclockwise from center 4 Press the ESC Off switch four times within 20 seconds The ESC Off Indicator Light should appear and disappear four times 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 through 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 through 7 to re enable HSA functionality ee STARTING AND OPERATING 511 EVIC Equipped Vehicles HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equipped vehicle If you wish to turn off the HSA feature refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipp
370. ion 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch 2 the headlights to the high beam position Refer to Multifunction Lever in this section for further infor mation 3 NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 25 mph 40 km h Select Automatic High Beams OFF through the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights from the high beam to the low beam position Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO A to the on position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Parking Lights And Panel Lights Dy To turn on the parking lights and instrument c panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031464205 Fog Light Switch The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
371. ion Center EVIC Messages e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled e Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled e Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled e Service Airbag System Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off Cruise Ready Cruise Set To XXX MPH Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire s Inflate Tire to XX 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e e e e e e e e e Service Tire Pressure System Parking Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Service Electronic Braking System Engine Temperature Hot Battery Voltage Low Service Electronic Throttle Control Lights On Right Turn Signal Light Out Left Turn Signal Light Out Turn Signal On Vehicle Not in Park Key in Ignition Key in Ignition Lights On Remote Start Active Key to Run Remote Start Active Push Start Button Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted Too Cold Remote Start Aborted Door Open Remote Start Aborted Hood Open Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open Remote Start Aborted Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset Service Airbag System Service Airbag Warning Light Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 e Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled e Service Transmission Front Seatbelts Unbuckled e Service Shifter Door Open e Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling Doors Open
372. ion as the pulling vehicle After the vehicle becomes free the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles The driver of the pull ing vehicle should let off the throttle without using the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 brakes once signaled by the other driver This se quence is important to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle WARNING Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps with a clevis pin These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if a strap breaks which could cause severe injury Never leave more than two or three feet of slack in the strap More slack than this greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle dam age Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from a strapping or winching situation e Winching Refer To Winch Operation For Additional Information Winching is most commonly used in the following situations there is no support vehicle available a high controlled force is required to recover the vehicle there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage or where nothing else seems to work A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of control It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the situation in a slow controlled manner This control works well for avoiding further vehicle damage Once you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good anchor p
373. ion is turned OFF they will automatically turn off after 15 minutes 031471116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Ambient Light Cargo Light The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil button ity of the floor console area 031464207 031471117 Cargo Light Switch Ambient Light The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed as part of the Illuminated Entry feature 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031464208 Turn Signal Lever NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signa
374. ions can result in serious or fatal injury es STARTING AND OPERATING 469 After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e e e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary 4
375. ions diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 757 Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on t
376. is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 4 Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster if equipped and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance fro
377. is feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Lock When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected
378. is recommended you contact your authorized tire or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 544 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING WARNING Continued Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure ani loss Ore ele control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use e km Be with load ratings SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION Never use a tire with a smaller load index or F EQUIPPED capacity other than what was originally equipped A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load gers 150 lbs 68 kg each plus 200 lbs 91 kg of cargo index could result in tire overloading and failure Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle You could lose control and have a collision will be found on the face of the driver s door
379. is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required
380. ises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion 500 STARTING AND OPERATING FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L 6 4L ENGINES ONLY IF EQUIPPED This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the in
381. isk of vehicle impingement on the surroundings then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be taken during the recovery then nothing can do the job better than a winch If you are severely hung up on something you should jack the vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing further damage This should be tried before attempting any recovery method 466 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle without first clearing the object may result in additional under body damage e Rock Cycling Your Vehicle Rock cycling your ve hicle is one of the easiest fastest and most commonly used methods This simply involves shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE while applying throttle after each shift During this process for addi tional traction try turning your steering wheel quickly back and forth no more than a turn If you are stuck in mud sand or snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean the debris from the tread and improve the traction You want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle This helps build vehicle momentum which hopefully gets you out Remember to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the shift If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free stop and try another method
382. itch is located on the upper switch bank just below the radio A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery WHAT TO DO INEMERGENCIES 607 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater
383. ith engine running Protection Mode In order to protect the air suspension system the vehicle will enter Protection Mode when load leveling cannot be achieved Some driving may be required to clear the protection mode telltale in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion NOTE If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected 442 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Operation The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve When raising if multiple indicator lamps are flashing the highest flashing indicator lamp is the posi tion the system is working to achieve When lowering if multiple indicators are flashing the lowest solid indica tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve P
384. ivated In this mode the transmission remains in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is se lected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission 3906 STARTING AND OPERATING Se In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation Six Speed Transmission The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will not shift above third gear but will shi
385. ive Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up to 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEAR ING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufa
386. ized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passengers and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required A central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags if equipped SAB air bags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear rollover or side collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial
387. k appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn with Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection press and release the E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Sound Horn With Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection scroll up or down u
388. kers A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to Power Distribution Center Location the following chart 710 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F01 80 Amp Rad Fan Control F08 40 Amp Emissions Diesel Red Module If Green If Equipped equipped Gas amp F03 60 Amp Rad Fan If Cum Yellow Equipped muns F05 40Am Compressor for Air Diesel P deae 20 Am Green Suspension If P Yellow Equipped 1500 F06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes LD Die Green Electronic Stability sel Control Pump F07 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Green es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 711 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F09 40 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater F10 50 Amp Body Controller Green If Equipped Red Exterior Lighting Gas amp 2 If Equipped Cum with Stop Start mins F11 30 Amp Integrated Trailer Diesel Pink Brake Module If 30 Amp Equipped ao FI2 40 Amp Body Controller 3 LD Die Green Interior Lights sel F13 p Amp Blower Motor reen F10 40 Amp Body Controller pf Coen Exterior Lighting 2 F14 40 Amp Body Controller 4 Green Power Locks 712 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M
389. kes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 695 WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surf
390. l for further information Off Road 2 OR2 Raises the vehicle approximately 2in 51 mm This position is intended for off roading use only where maximum ground clearance is re quired To enter OR2 press the Up button twice from the NRH position or once from the ORI position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h While in OR2 if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to 438 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e e ORI Off Road 2 may not be available due to vehicle payload an EVIC message will be displayed when this occurs Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 setting be aware of your surroundings you may not have the clearance required for certain areas and vehicle dam age may occur Aero Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 6 in 15 mm 1500 Models Only This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 100 km h and 66 mph 106 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph 106 km h The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph 48 km h and 35 mph 56 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph 48 km h NOTE
391. l for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing condi tions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weather Adjusting GAIN NOTE This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 30 40 km h 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly ad justed See your trailer dealer if necessary 2 Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec tions according to the trailer manufacturer s instruc tions 586 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 9 When a trailer with electric EOH brakes is plugged in the trailer connected message should appear in the EVIC if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM braking functions will not be available the GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be selected from the EVIC options Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel until TRAILER TOW appears on the screen Press the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter TRAILER TOW Press the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen NOTE 1500 Models Only Light Electric and Heavy Electric will only be available due to the tow capacities of the vehicle 7 Press the RIGHT arrow and then press the UP or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen In a traffic
392. l another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off 031464209 High Low Beam Switch 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed nnn L NS Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper opera tion Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position The delay can be regu
393. l in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display
394. l nuts until the vehicle has been lowered Using the lug wrench finish tightening the wheel nuts using a crisscross pattern The correct wheel nut tightness for a cone type wheel nut is 120 140 ft Ibs 160 190 N m torque for a flanged type wheel nut is 130 160 ft Ibs 175 215 N m torque If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 7 Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible 622 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do 1 Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve nience in checking the spare tire inflation Slide the TO SOW The PATO pate wheel retainer through the center of the wheel NOTE
395. l turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams SmartBeam If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights If Equipped When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Th
396. lable cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg 532 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and TOTAR FRONT REAR from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 Ibs Weight 865 Ibs af 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs minus 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Is TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs minus 400 Ibs 465 Ibs B11a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 533 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion T
397. lated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every one second The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Windshield Washers To use the windshield washer push the washer knob located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the second detent Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is released from this position If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed while in the off position the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is re leased To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
398. ld Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected an
399. ld not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 1 2 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat 114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See 5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plat
400. le to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited 754 Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns
401. le needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Continued WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC if equipped and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING Continued In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC if equipped and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SA
402. lection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning as this can cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the
403. less of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock all doors 021871225 Press The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT grab the door handle when pressing the door handle lock button This could unlock th
404. llar Location 342b ERR OR E ERG 528 Brake Assist System less 506 Brake Control System Electronic 505 Brake Fluid 522 r9 Rex 694 Brake System sesa taceam ee RR eed 502 Anti Lock ABS 0 0 0 2 000000 cee eee 503 Fud CHECK 3 25 2wpRSE 629 4004 4 ah Re aed 694 Master Cylind r nc ene eem RR ke 694 Parking essesesia nica eber RAS PR Eu 500 Warning Light sack code anita sane aah ie 277 Brake Transmission Interlock 0 0 379 Bulb Replacement 0 0 0 0 00 eee eee 720 Bulbs Light sus cere en Ceuta ae eos 128 Cab Top Clearance Lights 0 0 729 Camera Rear 0 0 es 208 Campers 23 s pue eaa t eres eae dere 262 Capacities Fluid anna ee eee 732 Caps Filler Oil Engine sessed RR m0 677 Power Steering iaa ee ere gc ace d 499 Radiator Coolant Pressure 764 INDEX MMM Carbon Monoxide Warning 125 Cargo Liht meaai rais aane ett reor fact ie E 177 Car Washes s e 2 obse Aa ene has 703 Cellular Phone sessie 0 0 cee ee eee 338 Center High Mounted Stop Light 727 Center Seat Storage Compartment 237 Certification Label 00 0000 eee 567 Chart Tire SIZING 2s ge ca cts rees bees Reeds 523 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 276 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 124 Checks safety cease ee RESET RES 124 Child R estraint 4 22s oss ie o 89 Cigar Lighter eee e
405. lls on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear a video display illuminates to display the image generated by the rear view camera located on the tailgate handle The auto dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view viewing asset 94 4 030471113 Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror 030405626 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Folding Mirror All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manu CAUTION ally folded both forward
406. load compartments in the pickup box There are four tie down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs 450 kg total RAMBOX IF EQUIPPED The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box stor age and cargo management system consisting of three features Integrated box side storage bins Cargo extender divider Bed rail tie down system RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup box The cargo storage bins provide watertight lockable illuminated storage for up to 150 Ibs 68 kg for 1500 series vehicles or 300 Ibs 136 kg for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles of evenly distributed cargo UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 CAUTION Failure to follow the following items could cause damage to the vehicle e Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is properly secured Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 Ib 68 kg 1500 series vehicles or 300 Ibs 136 kg for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles per bin To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked press and release the button located on the lid The RamBox RamBox Cargo Storage Bins lid will open upward to allow hand access Lift the lid to fully open NOTE RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is pressed if the RamBox is locked 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 036705542 RamBox Pushbutton
407. located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity 540 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replace
408. luminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the drivetrain NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 414 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Delayed shifts out of four wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low or uneven tire pressures excessive vehicle loading or cold tempera tures WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrai
409. lutch pedal on manual transmissions and check that the vehicle operates normally NOTE With electronic shift transfer case e Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL N and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met before pressing the button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 607 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools E IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 607 1500 Series sarat sid cae Re be Saw a oe 624 E JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 1500 Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped 626 SERIES TRUCKS 0 00 00 cee eee 608 Wheel Nuts 0 0 000 eee eee eee Jack Eocatiotu 32i ced redo d 609 W JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 2500 AND Removal Of Jack And Tools 1500 Se
410. lved in another collision the air you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im particles The particles are a normal by product of the mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con process that generates the non toxic gas used for air troller ORC system serviced as well bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bump
411. ly two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 7 High Beam Indicator This light shows that the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 8 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the seat belt reminder light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 9 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb che
412. m h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 542 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to replacement tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or 055007576 higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main i view Te tenance schedule is highly recommended 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPER
413. m the window 5 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demister outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode J Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individu ally adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode e Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode J Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side gt window demister outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind shield To improve fuel economy utilize these modes only when required UNDERSTANDI
414. main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed 662 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle s battery is discharged see Manual Park Release or Shift Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Dam age to your vehicle may result from improper towing Two Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable this vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions e The transmission must be in NEUTRAL The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km for 6 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km for 6 speed transmission or 30 miles
415. man Dutch Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of mea sure To make your selection press and release the SELECT button the selected setting will be displayed Nav Turn By Turn If Equipped When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Park Assist System If Equipped The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features O
416. missions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 687 Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and
417. mitter with integrated key The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors the tailgate and the RamBox if equipped The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 020207434 0202005004 Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter Key Fob With RKE Transmitter Keyless Enter N Go IGNM Fob KIN Remote Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE trans mitter once to unlock the driver s door If EVIC is setup for driver door first otherwise this will unlock all doors or press the unlock button twice within five seconds to unlock all doors the tailgate and the RamBox if equipped The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the
418. mium System If Equipped 554 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 564 Tire Pressure Information System TPIS B ADDING FUEL 000040 564 3500 Series Trucks 0 0 00006 558 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 567 General Information 559 E VEHICLE LOADING 567 Be RE RE aN ecient pe gana et iae mo Certification Label orreri sararins tist 567 iin a dibus deat 960 W TRAILER TOWING eee 569 SZL Brigiries i icem e ee ee a 560 Common Towing Definitions s s 570 Reformulated Gasoline 561 Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 561 Weight 4 4343 ep RES ded DRE ES 575 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 561 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer MMT In Gasoline ccs 562 H a Set arise nina ane 2d Trailer And Tongue Weight 578 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Towing Requirements 000 580 MI RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND Towing Tips ucc candid eek re er ba 590 MOTORHOME ETC qa tema santo nis hema 320 E SNOWPLOW LLL 591 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 596 Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive PON Models Oy s quote ode ase eres ie Mod lss reae raseras tiai e 597 2500 3500 Models Only nananana aana 592 Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Modelu secte nt dentato erus
419. mmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the Ve hicle Security Alarm is activated interior switches for door locks are disabled The system provides both au dible and visible signals for the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash Rearming Of The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is s
420. n Entry Exit Mode Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode Entry Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph 53 km h If vehicle speed is reduced to and kept below 15 mph 24 km h indicator lamp 4 will flash and indicator lamp 3 will remain solid until Entry Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off Transport Mode No indicator lamps will be illumi nated Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle Tire Jack Mode indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be illuminated Tire Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle e Wheel Alignment Mode indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM 2500 3500 MODELS ONLY IF EQUIPPED Description The air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height system The main purpose of this system is to maintain the truck s rear ride height level 444 STARTING AND OPERATING Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch Normal Ride Height NRH This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving Trailer Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 1 in 25 mm This position will lower the suspension system to connect and level the trailer The trailer button will blink continuously until trailer height has been achieved The system requires that the ignition be in ON RUN position or the engine running for all use
421. n Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F39 30 Amp Vehicle System In F47 10 Amp Snow Plow Pink terface Module 1 Red Right If If Equipped Equipped F41 10 Amp Active Grill Shutter F49 10 Amp Instrument Panel Red Red Cluster F42 20 Amp Horn F50 20 Amp Air Suspension Yellow Yellow Control Module If F43 10 Amp Snow Plow Left Equipped Red If Equipped F51 10 Amp Ignition Node F44 10 Amp Diagnostic Port Red Module Keyless Red Ignition F46 10 Amp Tire Pressure Moni F52 5 Amp Battery Sensor Red tor Tan ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 715 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F53 20 Amp Trailer Tow Left F58 20 Amp Engine Cooling Yellow Turn Stop Lights Yellow Pump F54 20 Amp Adjustable Pedals Gas Yellow Engine F55 20 Amp E38 Radio If dei i Amp Yellow Equipped Natural atura F56 15 Amp Additional Diesel Cum Blue Content If mins cha a Diesel F57 20 Amp Transmission Engine Wow F60 15 Amp Underhood Lamp Blue F61 20 Amp Power Take off Yellow Unit If Equipped 716 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F62 10 Amp Air Conditioning F67 10 Amp CD DVD Red Clutch Red Bluetooth Hands F63 20 Amp IgnitionCoils Gas free Mo
422. n Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 520 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the g Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially OFF off o
423. n Node KIN Emergency Key Removal Remove Screw From Transmitter Case 2 separating RKE halves requires screw removal and gently prying the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 021334199 0213004940 Separating Ignition Node Module IGNM Transmitter Separating Keyless Ignition Node KIN Transmitter Case Case E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over General Information battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the This device may not cause harmful interference new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause e This device must accept any interference received battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it including interference that may cause undesired op with rubbing alcohol eration This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap halves together proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate
424. n and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4H Four Wheel Drive High Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only N Neutral This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 4L Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h CAUTION Do not use 4L Low range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement Driveline hardware dam age can result Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Case 2H To 4H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can
425. n as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 705 Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp
426. n dusty or off road conditions e Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required e Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick O00 mrcomroo moz z A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 743 i i A Maintenance Chart l N z T Mileage or time passed o o o o o o e o 2 2 e 2 e whichever comes first Se S S S S S S S S e S N AZIS R 3 lS Ej z ex 2 2 2 8 Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A Or Kilometers o o lololo 2 2 2 S 2 2 2 2 2 E 8 8 8 8 8 2 8 2 8 8 S S F S SES EL S SIJSIEISISIRSIRIE Additional Inspections H Inspect the CV Universal joints X X X E Inspect front suspension tie rod U ends and replace if necessary 5 i E L Inspect the front and rear axle E surfaces If gear oil leakage is 8 suspected check the fluid level X X X X X X X If using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing change axle fluid 744 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A I Mileage or time passed o o o e o e o o e S 2 2 8 2 N whichever comes tirs 8 8 8 8 8118 8 8 29 2 2 2 2 2 d amp 8 9 amp 8 8 8 S8 8 9 2 s5 9 s Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Kilometers 2 I 2 S N ms 888 88 8858 88 8 8 8 sis ziss ss sS FI ZIE s sS a3 sg
427. n met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected posi tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel l Transfer Case Switch Five Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions Two wheel drive high range 2WD Four wheel drive automatic range 4WD AUTO e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK STARTING AND OPERATING 429 e Four wheel drive low range AWD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD or four wheel drive position AWD AUTO for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD For variable driving conditions
428. nal towing N Otherwise internal damage will result WARNING Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re You or others could be injured or killed if you leave internal parts Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged quirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging Continued Continued 600 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses WARNING Continued 3 Press and hold the brake pedal the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N 4 Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission position disengages both the front and rear drive 5 shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle With manual shitt transfer caus shaft the transfer to move even if the transmission is in PARK The case lever into NEUTRAL N parking brake should always be applied when the driver is notin the vehicle e With electronic shift transfer case press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL N button Some models have a small recessed N button at the center of the transfer case switches that must be pressed using a ballpoint pen or similar object Other models have a rectangular NEUTRAL switch below the rotary transfer case control knob The NEUTRAL N indi
429. nch to pry off the wheel skins Insert the flat tip completely and using a Continued en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 627 back and forth motion loosen the wheel skin Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet When replacing the hub caps tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torques are shown in the fol lowing chart Type Stud Hex Size Torque Torque Nut Size Ft Lbs Newton Meters Cone M14 x 1 5 22mm 120 140 160 190 Flanged M14 x 1 5 22mm 130 160 175 215 628 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Ss SEs o t e SERIES TRUCKS WARNING Continued The jack is d
430. nd release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected e Trailer Brake Type When this feature is selected the Trailer Brake Type can be changed between Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH and Heavy EOH To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer to Integrated Trailer Brake Module in Starting And Operating e Trailer Name When this feature is selected the Trailer name can be selected from 16 names To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected PhonelBluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect User s Manual es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Air Suspension If Equipped After pressing the Suspension soft key the following settings will be available e Sound Horn with Remote Lower When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER
431. nd to get heavy loads rolling improve traction or whenever 4H High Range traction will not do the job ee STARTING AND OPERATING 455 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand CAUTION There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant steady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s momentum On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use 4L Low Range with a gear low e Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and enough to maintain your momentum without shifting traction at slower speeds shift the transmission to a If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L Low Range wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased to maintain headway Over revving the engine can threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to normally full of debris
432. nd one of the following will be displayed A vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON Tire Pressure Information System 3500 Series Heavy Duty Ram Trucks Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Tire Pressure is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button and one of the following will be displayed A vehicle ICON is displayed with the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Refer to the Tire Pressure Information System TPIS under Starting and Operating for further information Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Hy button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted e Average Fuel Economy Miles Per Gallon MPG or L 100 km with Bargraph Range To Empty RTE e Current Miles Per Gallon MPG Trip A Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow ftripA button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in s the EVIC The Trip A information will display the following ast e Distance e Average Fuel Economy e Average Speed e Elapsed Time Hold the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to reset all the information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 30
433. nded in a vehicle and do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON Run mode Occupants particularly unattended chil dren can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could Power Sunroof Switch also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 034171114 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and
434. ne Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light el e Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Se se v3 This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low e Low Coolant Level Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale This telltale indicates that the transmission E fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this telltale turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEU TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off e Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale If Equipped A Se Yy Protection Mode will automatically be selected in order to protect the air suspension system air suspension adjustment is limited due to paylo
435. nents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E 85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 562 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on poor engine performance poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions
436. nformation Center EVIC the EVIC will display Key In Ignition SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unau thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine NOTE A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on dur
437. ng for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the tran
438. ng is complete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN re
439. ng with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see Active Dynamic Guidelines which deflect with steering wheel angle over the ParkView Back up Camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear To make your selection touch the Park View Backup Camera Active Guidelines soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e ParkSense Front Park Assist Chime Volume Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect System if equipped The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM Refer to EVIC settings or Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your I
440. nly recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L 5 7L Engines 1500 Models Only MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil amp or Shell Helix is recommended for all operating tem peratures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9 55535 S1 or Fiat 9 55535 53 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting MS 6395 is not available Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models Only MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil amp or Shell Helix is recommended for all operating tem peratures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may
441. not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 126 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassem
442. nstrument Panel for further in formation e ParkSense Rear Park Assist Chime Volume Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect System if equipped The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Refer to EVIC settings or Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Four Corner Air Suspension Modes If Equipped There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations Tire Jack Mode is se lec
443. nt or Rear ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display FRONT PARKSENSE OFF or REAR PARKSENSE OFF Furthermore once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display FRONT PARKSENSE OFF or REAR PARKSENSE OFF mes sage for five seconds followed by a car graphic with OFF in the corresponding side This car graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia bumper Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 18 in 45 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be display
444. ntally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 0 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 0 km h To decreas
445. ntil the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Key Fob Linked To Memory When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the seat mounted switch To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the sys tem has been deactivated 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In
446. ntrol of the vehicle which could result in serious injury or death Contact your local service center for assistance SAFE OFF ROAD DRIVING POWER WAGON ONLY Off Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics Your vehicle has excellent on and off road capabilities These off road capabilities will allow you to explore those wilderness trails where few travel providing a source of exciting and satisfying recreation Before you venture out you should contact your local governmental agency to determine the designated off road vehicle ORV trails or recreation areas You should always tread lightly and only use established roads trails or ORV recreational areas The National Forest Service Bureau of Land Management or local Department of Natural Re sources are a wealth of information and usually have maps with marked trails Skid Plates And Underbody Protection Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of the truck including the fuel tank transfer case and steering damper In addition this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members and fore aft rails This addi tional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off road situations that would be considered im passable by a normal truck Ramp Travel Index RTD The ramp travel index is the distance in inches that you can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20 degree ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 CAUTION ramp without lifting any oth
447. o Air Suspension If Equipped for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Entry Exit level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fas tened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreational towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly apply the parking brake Place automatic trans mission in PARK manual transmission in gear not in NEUTRAL 4 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 5 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key fob 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position 598 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not disconnect the d
448. ocation type and orienta tion of the obstacle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or from the Uconnect Sys tem if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features or Uconnect amp Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper and the de tected obstacle Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information ParkSense Display The warning display will turn ON indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and or right rear regions based on the obstacle s distance and location relative to the vehicle If an obstacle is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single arc in the left and or right rear region an
449. occurs the system will trap the key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running for vehicles with eight speed transmission and the brake pedal must be pressed Eight Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art fuel efficient eight speed transmission The electronic shifter control is located on the instrument panel The transmis sion gear range PRND is displayed both above the shifter control and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To select a gear range simply rotate the shifter control You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK see Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System You must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds To shift past multiple gear ranges at once such as Park to Drive simply rotate the shifter control to the appropriate detent Select the DRIVE range for normal driving
450. ocking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on WARN NCC Oee the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi Your vehicle could move and injure you and others cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill pedal released Make sure the transmission is in grade PARK before leaving the vehicle e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If case is in a drive position your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re RNING verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the someone or some bine aly shitt mio gear wher the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal parking
451. of noises from the hydro boost system during hard braking the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded conditions Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 505 NOTE Under cold temperatures pedal effort will be higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Hill Start Assist HSA Hill Decent Control HDC Electronic Stability Control ESC and Trailer Sway Control TSC All of the systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking NOTE ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers WARNING e ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from ex
452. of recovery Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment CAUTION Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an excessive high speed Do not spin your tires faster than an indicated 30 mph 48 km h e Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap Tow straps are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which is not stuck The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle component as an attachment point Using tow straps requires coordination between the two drivers Good communication and line of sight are required for a safe recovery First connect the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles There should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery If necessary join two tow straps together using a 1 inch hard wood dowel This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks Next have the tow vehicle backup leaving two to three feet worth of slack in the strap Then the tow vehicle using light throttle should accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recov ery at the time of the snap by slowly spinning the tires in the same direct
453. of the following components Receiver module Four TPM sensors Single Rear Wheel SRW applica tions e Six TPM sensors Dual Rear Wheel DRW applica tions Pressure display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The TPIS system will display all four Single Rear Wheel SRW applications or six Dual Rear Wheel DRW applications tire pressure values EVIC display If a system fault is detected the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received ee STARTING AND OPERATING 559 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer be displayed and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following e Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors e Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals e Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings e Using tire chains on the vehicle e Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 o
454. oint It needs to be strong enough to hold more than the vehicle s weight and provide a direction of pull as straight as possible Use block and tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the winch s pulling force If the anchor point is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable to the strap If it is another vehicle then place that vehicle in PARK and block the front tires If you cannot find an anchor point within reach try using your spare tire by burying it Once you have determined an anchor point hook up the cable ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum and place a floor mat or something else over the strung out cable Placing something over 468 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss the strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks Next place the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle as you power the winch in Be careful not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle Do not try to guide the cable into the drum If it starts to bunch up on one end let it You can re spool the cable afterwards Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and always stand back while winching WARNING Winch cables are under high tension when in use and can become a projectile if they fail Never stand over or straddle the winch cable Never jerk or overload the winch cable Never stand in front of the vehicle while winching Failure to follow these instruct
455. on press and release the SELECT 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Lock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mar
456. on Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 4 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 5 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Gi Rear d CAUTION Continued Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped window cleaners on the interior surface of the An indicator will illuminate when the rear window window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window turns off after 10 minutes 7 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button B CAUTION Provides the passenger with independent temperature Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to control Push the hard key button for warmer tempera
457. on Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 571 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling If equipped the electronic Trailer Sway Control TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applie
458. on and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfac tion HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 Cd iO Iglo i ED m I ELECTRONIC STABILITY ii t p i i i i du E Y O T i amp i i x s Di i i f 3 i i E A Dp iw EI i Nc CO t 8 2 i f i 1910 cS H D ie ima la im TI i i i i i i
459. on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate on the soft and hard keys when either button is selected Push either soft or hard key a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable soft key button greyed out if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield On systems with Manual Climate Controls the recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recircula tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se lected Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to
460. on the ground before fill ing e Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container when you are filling it Use only approved containers for flammable liq uid Do not leave container unattended while filling A static electric charge could cause a spark and fire hazard Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines Q that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar STARTING AND OPERATING 567 This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the tot
461. onally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 636 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIS m Ze Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage 2 Using the lug wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Placement of the jack 4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location For 2500 and 3500 4x2 series trucks when changing a front wheel place the bottle jack under the frame rail behind the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and t
462. once the engine is shut off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings If Equipped After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set t
463. onds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 759 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 762 INDEX eee Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 689 Adding Fuels 22 reete ot em epus 564 Additives Fuel 0 0 0 0 0000 cee eee eee 562 Adjustable Pedals 0000002000 186 AIIDag sec uae e ded E eb eee ESSE EE oS ad 69 Airbag Deployment 000000000 84 Airbag Light se gescii toie pme eh 2044 77 Airbag Maintenance llle 86 Airbag Side seseque RH ES ARES IA 73 Airbag Window Side Curtain 73 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 679 Air Conditioner Maintenance 681 Air Conditioning v ee gee eae RS 338 Air Conditioning Controls llle 338 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 681 Air Conditioning System lille 338 Air Pressure Tires llle 534 Air SUSPENSION 2 40944 ow eae e em eee d 436 Alarm Light ox pee muet petentes crus 280
464. ong as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value nn STARTING AND OPERAT
465. ons If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available ee STARTING AND OPERATING 561 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or Etha nol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system compo
466. ontains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled e Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema aS turely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted System Fault Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash vehicle doors will lock and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes NOTE f your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remo
467. ontinued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609 WARNING Continued The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas NOTE To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the auto matic leveling to be disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Jack Location The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat Removal Of Jack And Tools 1500 Series To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover located on the side of the front passengers seat To remove the cover pull the front part of the cover closest to the front of the seat toward you to release a locking tab Once the front of the cover is loose slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame 610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 060505826 060505827 Jack Access Cover Jack And Tools 1500 Series Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove counterclockwise remove the wing bolt and then slide tools from bag the assembly out from under the seat WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611 WARNING Continued you may experience abru
468. ook on the most outboard loop of the tow hook 494 STARTING AND OPERATING M Rigging Techniques Various winching situations will require application of other winching techniques These could range from too little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line rigging simply increasing pulling power or main taining a straight line pulling situation You will have to assess what technique is correct for your situation Think safety at all times 19 Disconnect the remote control Disconnect the remote control cord from the control box and store in a clean and dry place Winching operations are now com plete Put the cap on the solenoid plug in NOTE Always store the remote control in a protected clean dry area ee STARTING AND OPERATING 495 How To Change The Pulling Direction 064000984 Change Pulling Directions All winching operations should have a straight line from the winch to the object being pulled This minimizes the wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope A snatch block secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable you to change your pulling direction while still allowing the wire rope to be at 90 to wind properly onto the spooling drum Increasing Pulling Power In some cases you may find yourself needing more pulling power The use of snatch blocks increases me chanical advantage and that increases your pulling p
469. oors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro grammed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Memory To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall M
470. op Start Not Ready Steep Incline If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Extreme Outside Temperature If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too High If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too Low If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Driver Door Open If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Cabin Cooling Or Heating If Equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 e e e e e e e Stop Start Not Ready Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating Selected If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Front Defrost Selected If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Steering Wheel Turned If Equipped Stop Start Autostop Active If Equipped Stop Start To Restart Press Clutch Or Shift To Neutral If Equipped Stop Start Req d Fault Detected If Equipped Stop Start Cannot Autostart Hood Open If Equipped Stop Start Unavailable Service Battery If Equipped Stop Start Unavailable Service Stop Start System If Equipped Stop Start To Restart Shift Out Of Park If Equipped B Stop Start Off If Equipped Autostop Duration If Equipped The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC Red Telltales
471. or Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side a window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Defrost Mode ov Air comes from the windshield and side win dow demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may will increase 12 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 13 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the hard key button for cooler temperature settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically djust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 14 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the hard key button for warmer temperature settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft key for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the pa
472. or further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 697 NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Limited Slip Differentials 1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differential require that 5 oz 148 ml MOPAR Limited Slip Additive be added to the gear lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information The MOPAR Limited Slip Additive should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a Limited Slip Differential 2500 3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited slip oil additive friction modifiers NOTE When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ ential which requires a Limited Slip Additive the Limited Slip Additive should be added before the gear lubricant is added to insure proper additive fill Transfer Case Drain And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug The fluid level should be to the
473. or off road use e When not in use the extender divider should be in stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed e When in use all handles are to be in the locked position There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired location Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut TT Adjustable Cleats Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents along either rail in order to keep cargo properly secure 1 Utility Rail Detent To move the cleat to any position on the rail turn the nut 2 Cleat Retainer Nut 3 Utility Rail Cleat counterclockwise approximately three turns Then pull 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To remove the cleats from the utility rail remove the end SLIDE IN CAMPERS cap by pushing up on the locking tab located on the bottom of the end cap Slide the cleat off the end of the rail Certain truck models are not recommended for slide in campers To determine if your vehicle is excluded please refer to the Consumer Information Truck Camper Load ing document available from your authorized dealer For safety reasons follow all instructions in this impor tant document Camper Applications NOTE When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle
474. orless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 686 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with e
475. ose dirt and debris 2 Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft cloth or brush 3 Rinse bedliner with water 4 Once dry apply a small amount of MOPAR Spray On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner WARNING Do not use silicon based protection products to clean your bedliner Silicon based products can become slippery and may result in personal injury Spray On Bedliners are chemically resistant to many different types of chemicals including gasoline oil hydraulic fluids for short periods of time If a spill occurs on your Spray On Bedliner rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid permanent damage Repairing The Spray On Bedliner While extremely tough it is possible to damage a Spray On Bedliner One common condition is when loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is possible While not covered by your new vehicle warranty a cosmetic fix ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 709 to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required To repair a tear or gouge follow the directions provided in the MOPAR Quick Repair Kit FUSES POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains car tridge fuses micro fuses relays and circuit brea
476. other gear range as this can damage the drivetrain e When shifting into PARK pull the column mounted shift lever toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops For console mounted shifter firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated WARNING in the PARK gate Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever or road conditions You might lose control of the will not move out of PARK vehicle and have a collision REVERSE e e Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e CAUTION This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into Reverse only after the vehicle has come to a complete Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other stop reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational NEEISAE Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies periods with the engine running The engine may be for further information started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
477. ou could lose control and have an accident Always or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked to return the adjustable pedals to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Under ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec right side of the steering wheel tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use Electronic Speed Control Switches 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accide
478. ounterclock wise to unlock Always return the key to the upright vertical position before removing the key from the pushbutton CAUTION Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before moving or driving vehicle Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching hinging mechanisms Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle motion In order to minimize potential for damage secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy sharp objects with appropriate padding 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE RamBox Safety Warning RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal Lever 1i Equipped injury or damage to your vehicle As a security measure a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha WARNING nism e Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended e Do not allow children to have access to the storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke e In an accident serious injury could result if the storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storag
479. ow Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealer you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment 752 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE x IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the
480. ower 496 STARTING AND OPERATING Double Line 054000986 Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers of wire rope on the winch drum you can use a snatch block to double line out more wire rope This decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum and increases pulling power Start by feeding out enough wire rope to free the winch hook Attach the hook to your vehicle s frame tow hook and run the wire rope through a snatch block Disengage the clutch and using the snatch block pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit Secure to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain Attach the clevis shackle Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap chain being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn POWER STEERING 1500 Models The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually ee STARTING AND OPERATING 497 WARNING Continued operation with reduced or no power steer ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as pos sible If
481. owly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSenseG WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure WARNING Continued Before using ParkSense it is strongly recom mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing Continued 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M up or mov
482. peat from Step 2 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates program ming is complete To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the
483. ped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front And Side Impact Sensors And Vehicle Rollover In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFO
484. ped position by placing a lock through the locking hole 0367001174 Locking Hole NOTE Be sure the Tonneau Cover is secured before driving after installation For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover use MOPAR Whitewall amp Vinyl Top Cleaner and MOPAR Leather amp Vinyl Conditioner Protectant UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 273 EVIC Amber Telltales 000 298 E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 274 EVIC White Telltales ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 275 EVIC Green Telltales ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION EVIC Selectable Menu Items 300 CENTER EVIC redu sau iS E Rau REG 285 usps pape uis Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Features 2222394 ESI ee Ad per Be 304 Displays cis nn ae Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items 313 a ae 790 Wi Uconnect SETTINGS eee eee 315 Mes M DUI Hard Keys iiis 315 EVIC Red Telltales 296 SOE EYP qud Oe Saree eae Rt ies 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Bl Uconnect amp RADIOS IF EQUIPPED ll iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 52k cte REY TERR ERR ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED iiir deere bake babe 3 Radio Operation ssi kA REI ER CD Player 4 scent eer QU aon E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ll RADIO
485. peed selection and will put the trans mission into ERS but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission unless in Driver Override During HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions Driver Override The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at any time While in driver override the transmission will be in ERS which is a top gear limiter and the vehicle will shift from 1st through the gear that is being displayed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 513 Disabling HDC HDC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur Deactivating HDC HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph but remains below 40 mph Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni tude less than approximately 8 is on level ground or is on an uphill grade e Vehicle is shifted to park The driver presses the HDC switch The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range The parking brake is applied Driver door opens The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph for greater than 70 seconds The vehicle is drive greater than 40 mph HDC exits immediately 514 STARTING AND OPERATING xs Feedback to the driver The instrument cluster has a HDC icon and a HDC switc
486. per right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equip
487. ponse and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 499 Power Steering Fluid Check 2500 3500 Models Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal no
488. pt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force resulting in serious injury Removing The Spare Tire 1 Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle Insert the tube through the access hole be mm Jack And Tool Bag tween the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper WARNING and into the winch mechanism tube 060573848 After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving Continued 612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES y gt 060573849 2 Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613 060573850 060573851 3 Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain 4 Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to access to the spare tire retainer tilt the retainer at the end of the cable 614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Ss 060673852 5 Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel 060573853 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch WHAT TO DO
489. r ing Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the EVIC and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires An Inflate to XX message will also be di
490. r to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the igni tion button key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up STOP START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Stop Start function is developed to save fuel and reduce emissions The system will stop the engine auto matically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met Releasing the brake pedal will automatically re start the vehicle Automatic Mode The Stop Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start It will remain in STOP START NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than 5 mph 8 km h At that time the system will go into STOP START READY and if all other conditions are met can go into an STOP START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Autostop mode ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 To Activate The Autostop Mode The Following Must Occur 1 The system must be in ST
491. r Light in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel 4WD 4WD LOCK LOW 2WD E x NEUTRAL 051905705 Transfer Case Switch Four Position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK e Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure in this section for specific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damag
492. r attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll over which may result in severe injury or death e Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low Range with the transmission in first gear manually select first gear on automatic transmissions and pro ceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured or killed Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 soils If possible tr
493. r full off Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro priate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired to activate Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes STARTING AND OPERATING 521 TSC is only active in the default ESC On mode TSC TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION can be disabled by pressing the ESC Off switch and Tire Markings entering ESC Partial Off mode It is not active in the ESC Partial Off or ESC Off modes Refer to the ESC portion of this section for an explanation of the different ESC operating modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop
494. r of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Reclining The Seatback WARNING Continued The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Continued 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iS Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped Some models are equipped with a six way power pas senger seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard
495. r other property The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking per formance Condition of the trailer brakes driving and road state may also affect the selection 588 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be a increase in stop ping distance or trailer instability which could result The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven in personal injury pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector eee NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles e An aftermarket controller may be available for use wiring harness with trailers with air or electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the availability of controllers check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations e Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of the vehicle
496. r requested changes After the engine is turned off it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly this is normal The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 NOTE If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system To avoid per sonal injury or damage to the system see your authorized dealer for service Air Suspension Modes The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations Tire Jack Mode To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled This mode is intended to be used with engine running Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running Transpor
497. r to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and oper ating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e ParkView
498. r understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
499. r up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received EXAMPLE ONLY Tire PSI LH EN esnie 055900260 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM ee STARTING AND OPERATING 557 SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel
500. radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation 476 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WINCH USAGE POWER WAGON ONLY IF EQUIPPED Things To Know Before Using Your Winch General Winch Information Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery winch This winch uses the electrical power from the vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc tion By nature a winch is capable of generating very high forces and should be used with care Do not operate the winch without reading and understanding the com plete winch owner s manual Tensioning The Wire Rope The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use Follow the instructions below to tension the rope 1 Un spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the winch drum 2 Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point CA
501. rage areas behind the front seats The black latch plate can be detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on the inboard side of the passenger seat Insert the seat belt tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat belt tongue is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the extra web bing and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel thus freeing up all the area behind the Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue front seats 2 To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat pull the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there is an audible click For proper seat belt usage refer Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 022632836 Inserting Latch Plate In Use Position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occu pant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding proce dure to detach the black latch and black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach th
502. rages In addition Regular Cab models have tether 3 strap anchorages behind the front center and right seats Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have tether strap anchorages lo cated behind each of the rear seats Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 Tether Anchor THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH Standard Cab Quad a Cab Crew Cab Full Bench Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position PT 1 oe WARNING Mega Cab Tether Strap Mounting Behind Covers Never use the same lower to attach ara lt than one child restraint Please refer to Installing LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be E equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System tor Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a typical installation instructions Always follow t
503. railer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 581 WARNING Continued e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch 5 utilized e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
504. rates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the ON RUN position NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Keyless Ignition Node KIN If Equipped This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side
505. rature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 536 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your
506. re de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys tem is reduced e Trailer Sway control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode All Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD AUTO And 4WD LOCK Modes Can Also Choose The Following ESC Operating Mode This Is The Only ESC Operating Mode in 4WD LOW Full Off This mode is intended for off road use when ESC stabil ity features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESC Off switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESC Off Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message 518 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared In this mode ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a sp
507. re manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STARTING AND OPERATING 527 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 528 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s sid
508. refore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section Pressing the ERS switches column shift or moving the shift lever to the left or right console shift while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may sh
509. ressing the UP button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position assuming all conditions are met ie key in ON RUN position engine running speed below threshold etc The UP button can be pressed multiple times each press will raise the requested level by one position up to a maxi mum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc Pressing the DOWN button once will move the sus pension one position lower from the current level as suming all conditions are met ie key in ON RUN position engine running doors closed speed below threshold etc The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times each press will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Entry Exit Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current condi tions i e vehicle speed etc Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height The indicator lamps and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes Off Road 2 OR2 Indicator lamps 3 4 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2 e Off Road 1 ORI Indicator lamps 3 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in ORI ee STARTING AND OPERATING 443 e e e Normal Ride Height NRH Aero Mode Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this positio
510. result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used 678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE For 2500 3500 trucks with a 5 7L engine operat ing under a gross combined weight rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg or greater SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures Engine Oil Viscosity 6 4L Engine Use Pennzoil UltraTM 0WA40 engine or equivalent MOPAR oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard MS 12633 for use in all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment in this section Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil
511. result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is 408 STARTING AND OPERATING Se selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will not s
512. ries 609 PaO SERES TRU ERS gaddiupurh tre tere seed Removing The Spare Tire isses 611 Jack Location l i 628 nbus 615 Removal Of Jack And Tools 2500 po epus E a quud 3500 SSIES is sedie coo e itd den Dat 9d 628 Jack Instructions 1500 Series 616 d Removing The Spare Tire 2 630 Torsten The Hat OMS BIB sae casas ae aaa dac Pr parations 4 52 x vaccas gm ee Pow Ce d 634 606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se Jack Instructions 2500 3500 Series 635 W FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 654 To Stow The Flat Or Spare 641 B EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 2500 And TF EQUIPPED 526le RR Ree 655 3500 Series vede new e dae eR d 643 W SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 656 Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped 645 Column Shifter If Equipped 656 Wheel Nuts esee ee G Re oS 646 Center Console Shifter If Equipped 657 B HOISTING 5 2 ed erer ER a xd 649 B MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED E JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 650 TRANSMISSION 0 002 nr eee eee 658 Preparations For Jump Start 650 ING S DEABLED VERE sertac om Jump Starting Procedure isses 652 Two Wheel Drive Models 662 Four Wheel Drive Models 663 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher sw
513. riveshaft because fluid may leak from the transmission causing damage to internal parts Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models NOTE Both the manual shift and electronic shift trans fer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL N for recre ational towing Automatic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for recreational towing Manual transmissions must be placed in gear NOT in NEUTRAL for recre ational towing Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL N shifting procedure for your vehicle CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 599 CAUTION Continued e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case causing damage to CAUTION Continued Tow only in the forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for recreational towing e Manual transmissions must be placed in gear not in Neutral for recreational towing rs Before recreational towing perform the procedure Shifting Into NEUTRAL N ram outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL N to be Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL recreatio
514. rol There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control 045671419 Clockwise from the OFF position 2n i 045670070 1 Front Blower 4 RECIRCULATION Control 2 Temperature Control 5 Air Conditioning A C 3 MODE Control 6 DEFROST Mode 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures Rotating the knob clock wise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 045671420 Air Conditioning Operation Push the A C button to engage the Air Conditioning A C A LED will illu minate when the A C system is engaged 045671422 MAX A C For maximum cooling when MAX A C is selected the A C is turned on automatically and the air is recirculated NOTE A C cannot be deselected when in MAX A C position The LED will blink three times if the A C button is pushed If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the r
515. rom side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 535 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air tempe
516. rough the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113 Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It shou
517. rs or may not shift at all Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall In some situations the transmission may not re engage if the engine is turned off and restarted The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions and indicate what actions may be necessary 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Se In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps NOTE In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re engage after en gine shutdown perform this procedure only in a desired location preferably at your authorized dealer 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK if possible If not shift the transmission to NEUTRAL 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position On vehicles with Keyless Enter N Go press and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF 4 Wait approximately 30 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the
518. ry surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop 472
519. s If Equipped 173 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Lights On Reminder llus 174 Windshield Washers llus 181 Battery Savel ans eeta ona nes 174 Mist Feature 6 6 ee eee 181 Interior Lights 2 ese mm 174 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 182 Cargo Light oo dia ssi adeeb ow ER KA 177 M TILT STEERING COLUMN i n Multitanetion Lever xcix err rx 178 Mi HEATED STEERING WHEEL Turn Signals ceas cede pa ec ERU Ces 178 BS RINE abe hobs spent lane eipuse t Lane Change Assist 0000 179 Do UD iis d 7 MEM 186 Blash Io Pass 4 525 er Rees 179 E ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL 187 FORD Teeny vedi dbepidug ate i To GRO correre rais eai eid 188 MSVUSDEBIBEDONICERSOUNEL WOES podras m To Set A Desired Speed 5 189 PENSE a Sass eee eee dg ton To Deactivate o on eer eaa 189 Windshield Wiper Operation 180 To Resume Speed cc ccce 189 Intermittent Wiper System 180 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To Vary The Speed Setting 189 Mi PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK To Accelerate For Passing 190 BEIDE SIEUEQIPEEEUD wit intei
520. s WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in a vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the belt etc or if the air bag deployed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt 1 The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be disconnected to open up utilization of the sto
521. s Replace if damaged Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar through the rollers Watch and listen to Winch for proper snugness 2 Put on gloves 3 Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the winch drum rotate the clutch lever on the winch to disengage Freespooling conserves battery power Free Spool 4 Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap Free 5 the winch hook from its anchor point Attach the hook strap to the hook if not attached STARTING AND OPERATING 485 054000973 Hook Strap Pull the wire to the anchor point Pull out enough wire rope to reach your anchor point Be sure to keep a certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become twisted and over wrapped when slackened leading to wire rope damage To prevent losing the end hold the hook strap while you work 486 STARTING AND OPERATING 054000974 054000975 6 Secure to the anchor point Once you have established Tree Trunk Protector your anchor point secure the tree trunk protector or choker chain around the object Canon Always be certain the anchor you select will with stand the load NOTE How to choose an anchor point A secure anchor is critical to winching operations An anchor must be strong enough to hold while winching Natural anchors include trees stumps and rocks Hook the cable as low as possible If no natural anchors are available when recov ering another vehicle your vehicle be
522. s individual wheel brakes and or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 572 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Weight Distributing Hitch WARNING A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR requirements e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing systems may
523. s and Genuine Parts 734 Fog lights i RR RR Rs 173 Fold Flat Load Floor llle 244 Four Way Hazard Flasher lille 607 Four Wheel Drive 000 00 412 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 000 654 Front Axle Differential lle 696 Fuel st dina hake Sse wa GRAS Ha aoa ae ale 560 Adding sace kb eee ER ESSERE 564 Additives 4293s REG a eed 562 Clean Ais ois aO ac a a ae 561 Ethanol ve br de edere aes opem ee Ras 561 GROE ee veia toe pt aite ao e on iae RR ree es 560 Materials Added 2 0 0 cee eee 562 Methanol sac 3 Gente d RT DRE dg ooo nda 561 Octane Rating lt ics eR ehh em RE RR aes 560 Requirements isse ei iatea ees eda e das 560 Tank Capacity i2 cede Er o dr RR Rr de on 732 Fuel System Caution ssis rie llle 565 Fuses sseccue nnet one E LEETPLTCPSYe A 709 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 20 567 Gasoline Clean Air 0 0 ee 561 Gasoline Fuel llis 560 Gasoline Reformulated llle 561 Gauges Speedometer neces eee eR Res 280 Tachometer i223 ns eR Ye REX 275 Gear Ranges sx ins nes do aot S RR OR ee 390 Gear Select Lever Override l l 656 General Information 768 INDEX eee Glass Cleaning v0 4 x dae Reni aema RE saws 706 Grocery Bag Retainer 0 0000000 242 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 570 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 570 Guide Body Builders
524. s are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions 694 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and an MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc bra
525. s is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control right brighter or left dimmer When the head lights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odometer radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the right until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031464206 Dimmer Control Courtesy Reading Lights Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position full right position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se RKE transmitter if equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing on the corresponding lens 031406003 Rear Passenger Courtesy Reading Light NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have Front Courtesy Reading Lights been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the ignit
526. se a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously If you must back down a hill back straight down using REVERSE gear Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago nally across the hill When driving over sand mud and other soft terrain shift to low gear and drive steadily Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 WARNING e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the
527. se maintenance items specified in the fixed penalties being assessed against you maintenance schedule there are other components which WARNING may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me components or negatively impact vehicle perfor chanic P 8 X MP P mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675 CAUTION Continued Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintain
528. side of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your N that is not equipped with seats and seat Table Mode Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and 3 Lift the seatback to return the seat to the upright using a seat belt properly position Be sure the seatback is locked in place Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WARNING Continued Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle Improperly secured cargo can fly around in a sudden stop or collision and strike someone in the vehicle causing serious injury or death To fold either rear seat flat 1 Lift the handle located on the outboard side of either P of the rear seats 3 N 2 030907365 Handle 2 Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING An improperly latched seat could cause serious in jury or death Make sure that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers Head Restraints gu ME n r A Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury l by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head
529. smission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds such as towing a trailer up a steep grade or in stop and go traffic during hot weather In these conditions torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear when climbing a grade or shifting to NEUTRAL when stopped in heavy traffic can help to reduce this excess heat generation During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold temperatures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could
530. so that the wheel is dished inward That way the tread design of asymmetrical tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will maintain proper position TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will 550 STARTING AND OPERATING Se also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as l
531. splayed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE PRESSURE mes sage will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information STARTING AND OPERATING 553 Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors 5
532. ssage The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be ON when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the Front or Rear system is enabled If the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pressed and the system requires service the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON Service The ParkSense Park Assist System During vehicle start up when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display a PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED pop up message for five seconds After five seconds a car graphic will be displayed with UNAVAILABLE at ei ther the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly These ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 arc alerts will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS PARKSENSE UN
533. ssenger temperature setting at the same time 15 Temperature Press the temperature soft key to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the passenger compartment Moving the temperature bar into the red area indicates warmer temperatures Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature hard or soft control buttons Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain
534. ssible loss of vehicle control which may cause an accident possi bly resulting in personal injury or death Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages 412 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage and the transmission will not shift to sixth gear until the trans mission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 2 to 5 km of driving Because sixth gear is disabled and engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold This is normal Using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis sion into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to t
535. ssure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems ee STARTING AND OPERATING 593 WARNING Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in a collision Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de scribed earlier in this manual CAUTION The Lamp Out indicator could illuminate if exte rior lamps are not properly installed Before Plowing e Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level e Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight ness Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear The cutting edge should be 1 4 to 1 2 in 6 cm to 12 cm above ground in snow plowing position Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func tioning properly Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability For Information about snowplow applications visit www ramtrucks com or refer to the current Body Build ers Guide 1 The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two 2 The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR should never be exceeded 3 Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options or passengers etc 594 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss The loaded vehicle weight including the snowplow system all aftermarket accessories driver passengers options and cargo must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight GVWR or Gross Axle Weight GAWR ratings These weights are specified on
536. stored on the load floor Unfolding The Load Floor may move around with force and strike occupants Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until resulting in serious or fatal injury the load floor unfolds into position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under the Seat 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position 2 Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor mm 3 Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor WARNING Do not drive with the load floor in the up position 036606529 Load Floor In Open Position When stopping fast or in an accident the load floor 3 Reverse the procedure to store the load floor could move to the down position causing serious injury 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 036006530 Load Floor Securing Straps Pick Up Box Features 4 Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the _ Upper Load Floor Indents secured down position before you operate the vehicle 2 Bulk Head Dividers 3 Cleats PICKUP BOX The pickup box has many features designed for utility and convenience ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 NOTE If you are installing a Toolbox Ladder Rack or WARNING Continued Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box you must use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are availa
537. strument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle 054105820 Parking Brake Release When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate en STARTING AND OPERATING 501 NOTE e e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Leaving unattended children
538. switch Within five seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Insert the ignition key fob and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch Within five seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set NOTE Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
539. system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions This can help reduce braking dis tances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of BAS you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 507 WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The s
540. t Mode To assist with flat bed towing the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle below Normal Ride Height NRH and disable the automatic load leveling system This mode is intended to be used with engine running Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running 446 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running Protection Mode In order to protect the air suspension system the vehicle will enter Protection Mode when load leveling cannot be achieved Some driving may be required to clear the protection mode telltale in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion NOTE If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will app
541. t Mounted Side Air Bags SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants All seat belt systems except driver s front center and second row center position include Automatic Lock ing Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt web bing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag
542. t a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmis sion is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss WARNING Continued CAUTION e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a tion to the ON RUN position and also press the number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC The following indicators should be used to ensure that or ON RUN position A child could operate power you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi windows other controls or move the vehicle tion DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into an
543. t that can be used to power small electrical devices refer to Electrical Power Outlets for further l i information Center Storage Compartment 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 035305807 035305808 Upper Storage Compartment Lower Storage Bin With the upper lid closed pull on the lower handle to WARNING open the lower storage bin Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury Second Row In Floor Storage Bin If Equipped In floor storage bins are located in front of the second row seats and can be used for extra storage The storage bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for cleaning 239 P di In Floor Storage Bin And Latch To open in floor storage bin lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid NOTE The front seat may have to be moved forward to fully open the lid 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE pr E Opened Storage Bin Drivers Side Seatback Storage Seatback Storage Storage Regular Cab 035205575 035205816 Located in the back of both the driver and passenger The storage
544. t use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Tri Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri Fold Tonneau cover use MOPAR Whitewall amp Vinyl Top Cleaner and MOPARQ Leather and Vinyl Conditioner Protectant Spray On Bedliner If Equipped During ownership the shine and luster of the Spray On Bedliner can fade from oxidation road dirt heavy duty hauling and hard water stains Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading dulling and loss of gloss over time To help maintain the appearance of your Spray On Bedliner the manufacturer recommends you periodically 708 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at least twice per year using the MOPAR Spray On Bedliner Conditioner available at your local authorized dealer To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray On Bedliner Follow The Steps Below 1 Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any lo
545. tae s Oe Era edes 269 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced 030407085 by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you NOTE The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis abled when
546. te Start mode For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button e Remote Start Active Push Start Button will dis play in the EVIC until you press the start button Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the h
547. te your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U S residents only Uconnect RADIOS IF EQUIPPED For detailed information about your Uconnect radio refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Located inside the center console upper lid this feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect User s Manual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the back surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 045035190 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio CD or other valid audio source The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
548. ted or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Transport Mode When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to your authorized dealer for further information SiriusXM Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactiva
549. ted to assist in changing a spare tire Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before per forming a wheel alignment refer to your authorized dealer for information Protection Mode will automati cally be selected in order to protect the air suspension system when the payload has been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights wil
550. terval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Electronic Vehicle Informat
551. tery discharged e The transmission is not in DRIVE e Hood is open e Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode Other factors which can inhibit AutoStop include fuel level accelerator pedal input engine temp too high and steering angle It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP START system going into a STOP START READY state under more extreme condi tions of the items listed above To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode While in DRIVE the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed The transmission will automatically reengage upon engine restart During this transition the brakes will hold the vehicle to avoid undesired vehicle movement Conditions that will cause the engine to start automati cally while in Autostop mode The Engine Will Start Automatically When e The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to REVERSE or NEUTRAL To maintain cabin temperature near the HVAC settings e HVAC is set to full defrost mode e Autostop time exceeds 5 minutes Battery voltage drops too low ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 e Low brake vacuum e g after several brake pedal applications e STOP START OFF switch is pressed e 4WD system is put into 4LO mode e The emissions system requires it e A STOP START system error occurs Conditions that force an automatic shift to PARK while in Autostop mode The Engine Will Not Start Automatically and
552. the Safety Com pliance Certification Label on the driver s side door opening NOTE Detach the snowplow when transporting pas sengers Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica tions at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow Front end toe in should be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season This will help prevent uneven tire wear The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip ment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures Therefore when transporting the plow angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit Do not exceed 40 mph 64 km h The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adequate passing clearance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 595 Operating Tips Under ideal snow plowing conditions 20 mph 32 km h should be maximum operating speed The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility General Maintenance Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer s instructions Ke
553. the Steering icon is flashing it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance If the Steering icon is displayed and the POWER STEER ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP message is displayed on the EVIC screen they indicate that extreme steering maneu vers may have occurred which caused an over tempera ture condition in the power steering system Once driv ing conditions are safe pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion If the Steering icon is displayed and the SERVICE POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF message is displayed the EVIC screen they indicate the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers e If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service 498 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses POWER STEERING 2500 3500 Models The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle res
554. the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster If Equipped When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display
555. the Trans mission will be placed in PARK if The driver door is open and brake pedal released e The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is unbuckled The engine hood has been opened A STOP START system error occurs The engine may then be restarted by moving the trans mission shift selector out of PARK e g to DRIVE or in some cases only by a KEY START The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a SHIFT OUT OF PARK message or a STOP START KEY START RE QUIRED message to indicate which action is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start System 1 Press the STOP START Off switch located on the switch bank The light on the switch will illuminate 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 3 At the next vehicle stop after turning off the STOP START system the engine will not be stopped 4 If the STOP START system is manually turned off the engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the ignition switch 5 The STOP START system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the key is turned off and back on STOP START OFF Switch 2 The STOP START OFF message will appear in Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information
556. the heating elements ture settings or on the touch screen press and slide the e Use care when washing the inside of the rear Soft key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft key window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on for warmer temperature settings the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync Continued 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 8 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the hard key button for cooler temperature settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 9 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 10 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will
557. the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature ELECTRICAL POWER
558. the tail gate The bed extender will add an additional 15 in 38 cm in the back of the truck when additional cargo room is needed The extender position utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both sides of the truck bed near the tailgate ADITA 036706569 Extender Position To install the bed extender into the extender position perform the following 1 Lower the tailgate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 2 Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the 4 Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure center handle vertically in order to release the ex into place tender side gates 3 Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle 036706572 Locking Tab 036706571 Extender Installation 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Bed Rail Tie Down System CAUTION The maximum load per cleat should not exceed To reduce the risk of potential injury or property damage Cargo must be secured Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs e Extender should not be used as cargo tie down 250 Ibs 113 kg and the angle of the load on each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur e When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg load on the tailgate e The bed extender is not intended f
559. the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Obstacles such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 18 in 45 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the instrument cluster On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 CAUTION Continued The vehicle must be driven sl
560. the wire proper winch usage may result in severe injury e Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook when spooling wire rope in or out Never use as a hoist Never use to move persons Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling the wire rope Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or under load Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under load wire rope is in tension or wire rope drum is moving Continued rope hook and fairlead opening during operation and when spooling Never wrap wire rope back onto itself Always use a choker chain wire choker rope or tree trunk protector on the anchor Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to increase the length of a pull Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery strap attached directly to the winch hook Never use bungee straps that develop tremendous and potentially dangerous amounts of force when stretched Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 WARNING Continued e Always disconnect the remote control when not in use Never winch when there are less than five wraps of wire rope around the winch drum Always pass remote control through a window to avoid pinching lead in door then using remote inside a vehicle Never leave the remote control plugged into the winch while free spooling rigging or sitting idle General Information Practic
561. ther ways vehicle WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued Continued 128 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulg
562. tic with Gasoline Engine For Diesel Engine see Diesel Supple ment We recommend you use only ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid Failure to use ATF 4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission We recommend MOPAR ATF 4 fluid Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR BW44 44 Transfer Case Fluid ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 737 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Front Axle 1500 Four Wheel Drive Models We recommend you use MOPAR GL 5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 Rear Axle 1500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lu bricant SAE 75W 140 MS 8985 Limited Slip Rear Ax les require the addition of 5 oz 148 ml MOPAR Limited Slip Additive MS 10111 Front and Rear Axle 2500 3500 Models We recommend you use Synthetic GL 5 SAE 75W 90 Limited Slip 10 5 11 5 inch Rear Axles Limited slip additive is not required Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir 2500 3500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 or MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 740 Maintenance Chart 000 743 M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A
563. till present the system will ignore that condition and monitor the re maining doors and ignition To Arm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed To Disarm The System Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the exterior lights will blink three times Check the vehicle for tampering 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a pro grammed Sentry Key is inserted into the ignition switch To exit the alarming mode press the RKE trans mitter UNLOCK button or insert a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition switch The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the v
564. ting information can be found on most washer fluid containers 684 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed up operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield Windshield washer solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 685 WARNING CAUTION Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is col
565. tion With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector switch press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL N button until the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off After the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL N button After the NEUTRAL N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selec tor switch With electronic shift transfer case with pushbutton selector switch press and hold the switch for the desired transfer case position until the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off and the desired position indicator light turns on ee STARTING AND OPERATING 603 NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL N turning the engine OFF is not required but may be helpful to avoid gear clash With the 8 speed automatic transmission the engine must remain running since turning the engine OFF will shift the transmission to PARK and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL 5 Turn the engine OFF Shift automatic transmission into PARK On 8 speed transmissions the shifter will auto matically select PARK when the engine is turned off Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on a manual transmission Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle Start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal 10 Release the parking brake 11 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake pedal and c
566. to Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unex pectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Reset Auto Up latched or down position To enable the window controls press the window LOCK button again and return the Should the Auto Up feat t king the wind Vn e Ato p feature stop Worang e Window Switch to the released or up position probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Make sure the door is fully closed 2 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 3 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open
567. to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match ee STARTING AND OPERATING 515 the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position All Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK Modes Can Choose The Following ESC Operating Modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2WD 4WD AUTO AWD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles When ever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral back to 4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or ESC Off for specific reasons as noted below WARNING Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the
568. tor from the fog lamp bulb 3 Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1 4 turn to unlock the bulb from the housing 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the housing CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 073306034 2 Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side panel 726 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1 4 turn to unlock it from the housing 5 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 6 Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing 073306035 3 Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 727 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL With Cargo Lamp 1 Remove the two screws holding the housing lens to the body as shown 073301015 an 3 Turn the desired bulb socket 1 4 turn and remove the socket and bulb from housing 4 Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket 073301014 1 2 Separate the connector holding the housing and wir ing harness to the body 728 MAI
569. touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Quad Cab Crew Cab Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Standard Cab Mega Cab Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs
570. traints In This Vehicle 0226003585 Standard Cab V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position 2 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0226003587 0226003588 Quad Cab Crew Cab Full Bench Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab Split Bench V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position position 2 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 2 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 Quad Cab Crew Cab What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the LATCH an chorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages Full Bench Only Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position in vehicles equipped
571. transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position Continued 420 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation
572. ts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the origi nal position indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift 422 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss 2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped You can use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 8 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 2 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear en STARTING AND OPERATING 423 NOTE If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not
573. turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use Continued TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per form
574. urrent and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case posi tion the indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is
575. urs recirculation will be unavailable Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow can cause odor and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SSS Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS ene E Set the mode control to 7 vehicle interior is very P on and blower on high Roll down the windows tor a minute to flush out the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort e ial Cool amp Humid conditions e 6 Set the mode control to q and turn on it Go tt 6 6 46 to keep windows clear e Set the mode control to the 7 d position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the v position 8000cb71 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS E STARTING PROCEDURES 366 Normal Starting ns ege Reden 366 Automatic Transmission 366 Keyless Enter N Go orrai nsys areias 367 Normal Starting oe ie aaga aa 367 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Op 29 iig 4 chee E E be ae eo 369 O If Engine Fails To Start 0 369 After Starting cies stad bans ee ea 370 ll STOP START SYSTEM IF EQUIP
576. use Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great 458 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approximately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to a
577. ut of the vehicle Cancelling Remote Lowering Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime When vehicle lowering is can celled the vehicle will raise up to the next defined level and lock out the remote lowering feature until the ignition has been cycled ON OFF To cancel vehicle lowering press the Key Fob air suspen sion lowering button one time during the lowering process When vehicle lowering is cancelled the horn will chirp two times and the hazard lights will flash four times Once raising is completed the horn will chirp one time NOTE For further information refer to Air Suspension System in STARTING AND OPERATING Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436 Ignition Node Module IGNM Emergency Key Removal E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 0202005021 Keyless Ignitio
578. utomatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion is a small fan that draws air from the passenger compartment and pulls the air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M below the climate controls as well as soft keys located in the radio screen The fans operate at two speeds HIGH and LOW 1791 030905581 Press the switch once to choose HIGH press it a second time to choose LOW Pressing the switch a third time will turn the ventilated seat OFF When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When LOW speed is selected one light will be illuminated NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models equipped with remote start the drivers ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equippe
579. vate the heated steering wheel Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated 031705825 Steering wheel and light indicator NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Continued 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of dri
580. vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle 464 STARTING AND OPERATING Se downstream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning Airing Down For Off Road Driving Running lower tire pressure off road can improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly improving its surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form to the ground contour Different terrain tires and vehicles require different tire pressure Hard surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles You will need to experiment to determine what is right for your situation It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so start high and lower it as required Remem ber you must return the tir
581. vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air B
582. vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface the vehicle unstable and cause a collision It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off On single rear wheel SRW trucks install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel On 3500 dual rear wheel models DRW the wheel nuts are a two piece assem mm bly with a flat face Lightly tighten the wheel nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered 640 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 6 Using the lug wrench finish tightening the wheel nuts using a crisscross pattern The correct wheel nut tightness for a cone type wheel nut is 120 140 ft Ibs 160 190 N m torque for a flanged type wheel nut is 130 160 ft Ibs 175 215 N m torque If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 7 Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack
583. vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable and e The puncture is no greater than 4 6 mm ee STARTING AND OPERATING 537 Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Code Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake
584. ver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the Adjustable Pedals Switch steering wheel The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 031605590 The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in the steering column REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Ad SELMA justable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals NOTE or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim e Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the pedal travel adjustable pedal s path Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat pedal position WARNING For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Y
585. void spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depending on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle e Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail str
586. warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Air Suspension Display Alerts If Equipped When All is selected all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed When Warnings Only is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed To make your ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Aero Ride Height
587. wers Samia eS anes ae ded eo dra s 147 Rear Folding tie dora ke ated Reach dera a 157 Reclining Rear 22552 2 vog 943 0nd de os 156 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 21 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze LL 734 Sentry Key Immobilizer llle 18 Sentry Key Programming gt ssec setetest reotas 20 Sentry Key Replacement 00 19 Service Assistance onar u sae a a A T a 751 Service Contract s sess asse terri enana ris 753 Service Manuals 00000000 000004 756 Settings Personal 1 2 0 0 0 0 c eee eee 304 Shiftng sss sss RE ed Ae ole Ca pea ea 376 Automatic Transmission ss 379 Transfer Case vss ce keg eR eee ea Rod 415 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N N Shift Lever Override liess 656 shoulder Belts 12a emn 55 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 63 Side Aag s wats dats e Ud RR peu dee 78 Signals Tutti iu cedo oem pr doa E ee EES 128 Sliding Rear Window Powet 2 e694 RR RR EUR RR 243 SmartBeams 6 ee een 171 Snow Chains Tire Chains 00 545 Snow Plow llle 591 SNOW TES wae d dade se oha eee deta bapa d DG Es 537 Spare Mres scs pes Oe ERR oe wR REY EA d 539 Spark Plugs ege euet oR IES Rer 734 Speed Control Cruise Control suus 187 Speedometer s sier ertegen ag R RAS oa om 280 Stabilizer Sway Bar System 0 450 vrun MC ER 34 Automatic Transmission
588. wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed STARTING AND OPERATING 555 EXAMPLE ONLY Low Tire FSI 2345 mi Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the 055900259 556 STARTING AND OPERATING EVIC will stop flashing or return to it s original color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven fo
589. wing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to activate TOW HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss i 050170421 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation Normal operation is always the default at engine start up If TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 1500 Models Only The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering column if equipped or on the console if equipped You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK column shift only The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating the
590. witch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags they are lo cated in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC may be equipped e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Seat Belt Buckle Switch e Seat Belt Pretensioners 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Advanced
591. xt to 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Lights with Remote Lower If Equipped When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lower feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Trailer Select When this feature is selected the Trailer Type can be selected between Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 and Trailer 4 To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Trailer Brake Type When this feature is selected the Trailer Brake Type can be changed between Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH and Heavy EOH To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer to Integrated Trailer Brake Module in
592. y Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION e If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead your Key Fob will become locked in the ignition Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this condition damage could occur to the Key Fob or ignition module Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either e Jump Start the vehicle Charge the battery ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and push ignition button to place ignition
593. y select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch
594. ys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound If Equipped This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e AUX Volume Match If Equipped This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input To make your selection touch the AUX Volume Match soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Loudness If Equipped The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off To make your selection touch the Loudness soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Trailer Brake e Trailer Select When this feature is selected the Trailer Type can be selected between Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 and Trailer 4 To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press a
595. ys inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you 474 STARTING AND OPERATING ME OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope If natural obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill choo
596. ystem will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation HSA will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive 508 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e e Vehicle must be stopped Vehicle must be on an approximate 7 or greater incline Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEU TRAL ee STARTING AND OPERATING 509 Towing And Hauling With HSA The

2014 Ram Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents